JP2021122649A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine equipped with a protective cover capable of preventing deterioration of productivity, safety and durability.SOLUTION: A protective cover 22 is provided that protects a heat generating rear member 134. The protective cover 22 has a plurality of heat radiating holes 264 formed in a vertically long elongated hole shape for radiating heat from the heat generating rear member 134 to the outside. The heat radiating hole 264 has a first outer spreading portion 303 and a second outer spreading portion 304 formed in outward expanding shapes in the opposite directions in the plate thickness direction from a boundary portion 302 that is at the middle in the plate thickness direction of the protective cover 22. The first outer spreading portion 303 and the second outer spreading portion 304 have tapered shapes with smaller diameters on the boundary portion 302 sides.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 72

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines, arrange ball machines, and slot machines.

As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a gaming board in the main body of the gaming machine, and a liquid crystal display means constituting the image display means is provided in the vicinity thereof in the central portion of the game area of the gaming board. Game parts such as winning means and movable production means are arranged respectively.
On the back side of the game board, an effect board case accommodating an effect board for various effect control and a liquid crystal substrate case accommodating a liquid crystal substrate for controlling a liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right, and game control is performed below the effect board case. A main board case for accommodating the main board for use is arranged.
On the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a power supply board case for accommodating a power supply board for power supply and a payout board case for accommodating a payout board for payout control of game balls are arranged in front and behind under the main board case. Has been done. Further, on the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the entire effect board case and the liquid crystal board case and the upper side of the main board case from the back side is provided so as to be removable and openable.
On the back surface of the back cover, a large number of heat-dissipating holes such as elongated holes and round holes for dissipating heat from heat-generating parts such as the production board case and the liquid crystal board case are formed, and the heat-dissipating holes are used. The heat from the heat-generating parts inside the back cover is dissipated to the outside.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-144506

The heat dissipation hole of the conventional back cover has a tapered shape in which the opening end on the outside (back side) or inside (front side) has a small diameter, and is single in one direction over the entire length in the plate thickness direction of the back cover. It is composed of the tapered holes of. In the back cover provided with this single tapered hole-shaped heat dissipation hole, when the angle between the inner peripheral surface of the heat dissipation hole and the back surface or the front surface of the back cover at the outer peripheral edge of the small diameter side opening end is viewed. There are two types, one with a smaller angle and the other with a larger angle.
If the angle between the back surface of the back cover and the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole is reduced, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole will collapse and the inclination angle will increase, and the space between the heat radiation hole molding part of the mold and the back cover will increase. Since the mold release resistance is reduced, the back cover after molding can be easily removed from the mold, the production efficiency of the back cover is improved, and the back cover can be prevented from being deformed at the time of mold release.
However, if the angle formed is small, the outer peripheral portion of the small-diameter opening end of the heat dissipation hole becomes thin, so that the rigidity of the heat radiation hole forming region of the back cover is reduced, and the small diameter side opening edge of the heat dissipation hole is different. There is a problem that the appearance of the back cover as a whole is remarkably deteriorated, such as the contact portion being damaged and appearing white when it comes into contact with the member or the like. In addition, if the edge of the opening on the small diameter side of the heat dissipation hole is thin and sharp, there is a risk of injury at the sharp part during work.
On the other hand, if the angle between the back surface of the back cover and the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiating hole is increased, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiating hole stands up and the inclination angle becomes smaller. In addition to the improvement, there is an advantage that damage to the small-diameter open edge and injury due to the small-diameter open edge can be prevented.
However, if the angle formed is large, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole rises and the mold release resistance between the heat radiation hole molded portion of the mold and the back cover increases, so that the back cover after molding is removed from the mold. There is a problem that it takes time to remove the mold, the production efficiency of the back cover is lowered, and the back cover is easily deformed at the time of mold release.
In view of such conventional problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine provided with a protective cover capable of preventing a decrease in productivity, safety, and durability.

The present invention includes a protective cover that protects the heat-generating back member, and the protective cover has a plurality of heat-dissipating holes formed in a long vertical direction to dissipate heat from the heat-generating back member to the outside. In the gaming machine having the heat radiating hole, the heat radiating hole includes a first outer spreading portion and a second outer spreading portion formed in an outward expanding shape in the opposite direction in the plate thickness direction from an intermediate boundary portion in the plate thickness direction of the protective cover. It has.
The first outer spreading portion and the second outer spreading portion may have a tapered shape having a small diameter on the boundary portion side. The angle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the first outer spreading portion located on the heat-generating back member side of the protective cover and the inner surface of the protective cover on the heat-generating back member side is the heat-generating surface of the protective cover. It may be larger than the angle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the second outer spreading portion located on the opposite side of the back member and the outer surface opposite to the heat-generating back member. The heat-generating back member is a board case that houses a control board, and the protective cover may be a back cover that protects the board case from the back side.

According to the present invention, there is an advantage that productivity, safety and durability can be prevented from being lowered.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which shows the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a side view of the game machine. It is a rear view of the game machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the same inner frame and a game board. It is a top view of the game machine. It is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine. It is a side view of the same inner frame, the back cover and the like. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the inner frame, the back cover and the like. It is an exploded perspective view of the front door. It is a side sectional view of the first operation effect means and the like. It is a front sectional view of the 1st operation effect means and the like. It is a top sectional view of the first operation effect means and the like. It is a bottom view of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing at the time of molding of the operation button. It is sectional drawing of the engaging means. It is sectional drawing of the fastening means. It is a front view of the movable production means side. It is a front view of the movable production means side. It is sectional drawing of the main board case, the effect board case and the like. It is sectional drawing of the same main board case, the payout board case and the like. It is a perspective view of the back cover. It is sectional drawing of the same ball tank, a guide rail, a back cover and the like. It is sectional drawing of the guide rail, the back cover and the like. It is a top view of the guide rail, the back cover, etc. It is explanatory drawing when the back cover is opened. It is a top view when the game machine and the back cover are opened. It is sectional drawing of the latch means and the like. It is explanatory drawing at the time of opening and closing of the back cover. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd hinge means side of the back cover. It is an exploded perspective view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a plan sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a plan sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a plan sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is an exploded perspective view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a rear view of the main board case. It is a rear view of the production board case. It is a rear view of the liquid crystal substrate case. It is a rear view of the same payout board case. It is a rear view of the connection state of the board. It is a front view of the back cover. It is a rear view of the upper side of the back cover. It is a rear view of the lower side of the back cover. It is sectional drawing of the back cover. It is a perspective view of the main part of the back cover. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd hinge means which shows the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially broken side view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a vertical sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd hinge means which shows 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a side view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a vertical sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd hinge means which shows 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a rear view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a vertical sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a cross-sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a cross-sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is an exploded perspective view of the 3rd hinge means which shows 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a cross-sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a rear view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a vertical sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a cross-sectional view of the 3rd hinge means. It is a rear view of the gaming machine which shows the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the gaming machine which shows the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine which shows the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the open state of the gaming machine. It is a back view of the back cover. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the back cover. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine which shows the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a vertical sectional view of the gaming machine. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the inner frame, the back cover and the like. It is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back cover, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the back cover. (A) to (f) are cross-sectional views of the back cover showing the tenth embodiment. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the eleventh embodiment of this invention. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back cover, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the back cover. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the twelfth embodiment of this invention. It is a cross-sectional view of the back cover. It is a front view of the gaming machine which shows the thirteenth embodiment of this invention. It is a side view of the game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the inner frame. It is a perspective view of the front door. It is an exploded perspective view of the hinge means. It is an exploded perspective view of the hinge means. It is the upper side sectional view of the locking means. It is a cross-sectional view of the central side of the locking means. It is a lower side sectional view of the locking means. It is a top sectional view of the locking means. It is a top sectional view of the locking means. It is a top sectional view of the locking means. It is a perspective view of the unlocking mechanism of the locking means. It is a side view of the unlocking mechanism of the locking means. It is a rear view of the unlocking mechanism of the locking means. It is a front sectional view of the urging means. It is a side sectional view of the urging means. It is sectional drawing around the front door stop means. It is a cross section around the front door stopping means. It is sectional drawing of the front door stopped state. It is sectional drawing of the front door stopped state. (A) is a front view of the gaming machine, and (b) is a side view of the gaming machine. It is a schematic plan view of the gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing of the locking means. A fourteenth embodiment of the present invention is shown, where (a) is a cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the front door stopping means, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front door stopped state. It is a rear view of the gaming machine which shows the fifteenth embodiment of this invention. It is a plan sectional view of the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the resin. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the 16th Embodiment of this invention. It is a plan sectional view of the back cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the resin. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the 17th Embodiment of this invention. It is a plan sectional view of the back cover. It is sectional drawing which shows the flow state of the resin. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the resin. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows 18th Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the back cover. It is a rear view of the gaming machine which shows the 19th Embodiment of this invention. It is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine. It is sectional drawing of the back cover. It is a perspective view of the back cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the resin. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the twentieth embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the back cover. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the back cover. It is a perspective view of the back cover. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the 21st Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the back cover. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the 22nd Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the back cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the resin. It is a perspective view of the back cover which shows the 23rd Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the back cover. It is a perspective view of the back cover which shows the 24th Embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the back cover which shows the 25th Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the back cover. It is explanatory drawing of the board information display means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the resin. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the 26th Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the back cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the resin. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the 27th Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the back cover and the like. It is the rear view of the part cutout of the substrate case. It is a rear view of the back cover which shows the 28th Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the back cover.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 to 44 illustrate a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine 1 which is a pachinko machine. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3 arranged on the front side of the outer frame 2, and the front door 4 opens and closes on the front side of the inner frame 3. It is arranged freely. The gaming machine main body 2 and 3 are composed of the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3. The gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 may be configured by something other than the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3.

The inner frame 3 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge means 6 so as to be openable and detachable, and the front door 4 is pivotally attached to the inner frame 3 via the second hinge means 7 so as to be openable and detachable. The inner frame 3 and the front door 4 are worn, and can be locked to the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3 in a closed state by the locking means 8 on the opposite side of the hinge means 6 and 7.

The outer frame 2 connects a pair of left and right vertical frame members 9, an upper horizontal frame member 10 that connects the upper ends of the left and right vertical frame members 9 to the left and right, and a lower end of the left and right vertical frame members 9 to the left and right. The lower horizontal frame member 11 and the decorative member 12 arranged on the front side of the lower horizontal frame member 11 and connecting the left and right vertical frame members 9 form a rectangular shape.

The inner frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion 13 and a back protection portion 14 integrally on the upper side, and a lower mounting portion 15 is integrally provided on the lower side of the game board mounting portion 13. The game board 16 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting portion 13 from the front side. The back protection portion 14 protects the back side mechanism 17 arranged on the back side of the game board 16 from the outer peripheral side, and is a pair of left and right side wall portions that are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides and bend to the back side from the game board mounting portion 13. 18 and an upper wall portion 19 that bends backward from the game board mounting portion 13 and connects the upper side of the left and right side wall portions 18 in the left-right direction are integrally provided.

Of the left and right side wall portions 18 of the back protection portion 14, the side wall portion 18a on the side opposite to the first hinge means 6 is behind the side wall portion 18b on the first hinge means 6 side, as shown in FIGS. The amount of protrusion to the rear cover is small, and one end side of the back cover 22 is detachably attached to the attachment portion 20a on the rear end side via a plurality of third hinge means 21 in the vertical direction.

Further, the side wall portion 18b on the side of the first hinge means 6 of the back protection portion 14 has a larger amount of protrusion to the rear than the side wall portion 18a on the opposite side, and the rear end of the side wall portion 18b is inside from the rear end. There is a mounting portion 20b that bends to the surface, and the payout means 23 and the like described later are attached to the mounting portion 20b, and the back cover 22 abuts inside the payout means 23 by a pair of upper and lower latch means (stoppers) 24. It is detachably stopped.

Not only the left and right side wall portions 18 of the back protection portion 14, but also the left and right side wall portions 18 and the upper wall portion 19 that connects the upper end side thereof to the left and right have abbreviated the amount of protrusion (bending amount) to the back side. It may be the same. One latch means 24 may be arranged in the middle in the vertical direction, or three or more latch means 24 may be arranged on the outer circumference of the back cover 22.

On the lower mounting portion 15, a launching means 25 or the like for launching game balls one by one toward the game board 16 side is mounted on the front side, and a substrate is mounted between the lower ends of the left and right side wall portions 18 of the back protection portion 14. The pedestal 34 is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 16 is bored with a guide rail 27 that guides the game ball launched by the launching means 25 to the upper side of the game area 26 in an annular shape. A liquid crystal display means (image display means) 28 and a center case 29 corresponding to the front side of the liquid crystal display means 28 are arranged in the central portion of the game area 26. The center case 29 is detachably attached to the game board 16 from the front side, and the liquid crystal display means 28 is detachably attached to the game board 16 from the back side. In the game area 26 of the game board 16, various game parts such as a normal symbol starting means 30, a special symbol starting means 31, a variable winning means 32, and a normal winning means 33 are arranged around the center case 29.

The center case 29 is provided with a display window 29a corresponding to the display screen of the liquid crystal display means 28, and a normal symbol display means 35, a special symbol display means 36, and a normal hold number display means are provided on the front surface of the display window 29a on the outer peripheral side. 37 etc. are provided. The liquid crystal display means 28 constitutes a special reserved number display means 38, an effect symbol display means 39, a first operation guidance display means 40, a second operation guidance display means 41, and the like.

The ordinary symbol display means 35 is for displaying the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and is composed of, for example, two light emitting bodies (for example, LEDs) corresponding to two types of ordinary symbols "○" and "×". The two light emitters blink alternately for a predetermined time on condition that the normal symbol starting means 30 detects the game ball, and the hit determination random value acquired at the time of detecting the game ball by the normal symbol starting means 30 is predetermined. When it matches the hit judgment value, the illuminant on the "○" side corresponding to the hit mode emits light, and in other cases, the illuminant on the "x" side corresponding to the off mode emits light. The blinking is finished for each.

The special symbol starting means 31 is for starting the symbol variation by the special symbol displaying means 36, and includes upper and lower starting winning means 31a and lower starting winning means 31b at the top and bottom. The upper start winning means 31a is a non-opening / closing type. The lower start winning means 31b is an opening / closing type that can switch between a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter (or is difficult to enter) and an open state in which the game ball can enter (or easily enter), and is a normal symbol display means. When the stop symbol after the fluctuation of 35 becomes a winning mode (ordinary profit mode) and a normal profit state occurs, the closed state is opened for a predetermined time.

The special symbol display means 36 is composed of one or a plurality of, for example, three special symbol display means such as a segment type capable of variable display, and the special symbol start means 31 has an upper start winning means 31a or a lower start. On the condition that the game ball wins the winning means 31b, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and the jackpot determination random value (specific mode determination random value) acquired at the time of winning the starting winning means 31a and 31b is predetermined. When it matches the jackpot judgment value (specific mode judgment value), the special symbol stops in the predetermined jackpot mode (specific mode), and in other cases, it stops in the off mode (non-specific mode). There is.

In the normal hold quantity display means 37, when the normal symbol starting means 30 detects a game ball during the variable display of the normal symbol display means 35 or the normal profit state described later, the hit determination random value acquired at the time of the detection is obtained. Since it is stored up to a predetermined upper limit hold number (for example, 4 pieces), the number of stored collision detection random values (hereinafter referred to as the normal hold number) is displayed according to the number of light emitting bodies of the same number as the upper limit hold number. Therefore, the player is notified of the number of normally reserved pieces at that time.

The effect symbol display means 39 variablely displays the effect symbols 39a to 39c in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display means 36, and one or a plurality (for example, three in the left-right direction) of the effect symbols. 39a to 39c are configured to be variablely displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display means 28 together with various effect images.

The effect symbols 39a to 39c of the effect symbol display means 39 have a plurality of types of variation patterns at the same time as the start of variation of the special symbol when the game ball wins any of the start winning means 31a and 31b of the special symbol start means 31. The fluctuation is started according to any of the above, and after the fluctuation for a predetermined time, the fluctuation is stopped in the order of left, right, middle, etc., and finally stopped at the same time as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. The effect symbols 39a to 39c stop the fluctuation in the jackpot effect mode when the special symbol stops in the jackpot mode, and stop the fluctuation in the disengagement mode when the special symbol stops in the disengagement mode.

When the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 31 during the variable display of the special symbol or the special profit state, the special reserved quantity display means 38 has a predetermined upper limit of the jackpot determination random number value or the like acquired at the time of winning the prize. Since the number of holdings (for example, 4 each) is stored as the limit, the number of stored jackpot determination random values (hereinafter referred to as the number of special holdings) is displayed, and the player is notified of the number of special holdings at that time. It has become.

The first operation guidance display means 40 displays the first operation guidance image 40a indicating that the effect is in the effective period when the first operation effect becomes possible, and displays the first operation guidance image 40a to the player, which will be described later. The operation of the effect means 46 is urged. The second operation guidance display means 41 displays the second operation guidance image 41a indicating that the effect is in the effective period when the second operation effect becomes possible, and the second operation described later is performed on the player. The operation of the effect means 47 is urged.

In addition, each operation guidance image 40a, 41a is a special symbol when a predetermined operation effect condition is satisfied, such as drawing a lottery for a thermal super reach pattern or the like having a high probability that the special symbol after the change becomes a big hit mode. It is displayed in a timely manner from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation, and when the operation effect means 46 and 47 are operated during the display of the operation guidance images 40a and 41a, the first operation guidance image 40a specific to the liquid crystal display means 28 is displayed. By displaying the second operation guidance image 41a or the like, the appearance of the jackpot mode is produced for the player.

The variable winning means 32 is an opening / closing type provided with an opening / closing plate 32a that can switch between an open state in which the game ball can win and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win. When an extraordinary profit state occurs in a predetermined jackpot mode, the opening / closing plate 32a opens to the front side according to a predetermined opening pattern, and the game ball that has fallen on the opening / closing plate 32a is made to win a prize inward.

On the back side of the upper wall portion 19 of the inner frame 3, a ball tank 48 for storing game balls for payout, a guide rail 49 for guiding the game balls in the ball tank 48, and an external connection terminal for taking out an external signal are provided. The group 50 and the group 50 are arranged above the upper wall portion 19 of the back protection portion 14.

The ball tank 48 and the guide rail 49 are provided in the left-right direction close to the upper side of the upper wall portion 19 of the back protection portion 14, and the guide rail 49 is provided on the back protection portion 14 so as not to interfere with the external connection terminal group 50 side. It is arranged so as to project rearward from the rear end of the upper wall portion 19. The bottom surface side of the ball tank 48 and the guide rail 49 is inclined so as not to obstruct the flow of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the rear end of the ball tank 48 is on the front side of the rear end of the upper wall portion 19 of the back protection portion 14, and the rear end of the guide rail 49 is the upper wall of the back protection portion 14. It protrudes rearward from the rear end of the portion 19 and overlaps the upper side of the back cover 22. The external connection terminal group 50 has a large number of external connection terminals 50a in the left-right direction, and is provided on the front upper side of the guide rail 49.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the side wall portion 18b on the first hinge means 6 side of the back protection portion 14 has a large amount of protrusion to the rear, and the mounting portion 20b that bends inward in the left-right direction from the rear end. The payout means 23 for paying out the game balls, the ball supply passage 51 for supplying the game balls from the guide rail 49 to the payout means 23, and the game balls paid out from the payout means 23 to the upper plate 52 described later. The ball guide passage 54 for guiding the vehicle is provided in a row in the vertical direction.

The front door 4 has a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the inner frame 3, and a viewing window 53 for visually recognizing the game area 26 is provided on the upper side. As shown in FIG. 10, the front door 4 includes a rectangular door frame 55, a lower unit 56 mounted on the front surface of the door frame 55, a first upper unit 57, and a second upper unit 58. There is. The lower unit 56 is arranged below the viewing window 53 and in front of the door frame 55, and the first upper unit 57 is arranged vertically on the first hinge means 6 side of the viewing window 53. The second upper unit 58 straddles the left-right direction on the upper side of the viewing window 53 and the vertical direction on the opposite side of the first hinge means 6 of the viewing window 53, and is on the front surface of the door frame 55 in an L-shape in front view. It is arranged so that it can be attached and detached. The front door 4 is provided with an upper speaker 59 and a lower speaker 60 corresponding to the upper, lower, left and right sides of the viewing window 53.

The lower unit 56 and the first upper unit 57 are substantially common to a plurality of models of the gaming machine 1, whereas the second upper unit 58 is unique to the model, and the second upper unit is unique to the model. By combining the unit 58 with the common lower unit 56 and the first upper unit 57, the front side of the gaming machine 1 of the model is configured.

Therefore, if there are a plurality of types of the second upper unit 58, by appropriately selecting and mounting any of the second upper units 58, the outer frame 2, the inner frame 3, the door frame 55, and the like can be used in common. , It is possible to easily manufacture different types of gaming machines 1. The first upper unit 57 may be replaceable.

The viewing window 53 is closed by a glass unit (not shown) detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 55. The glass unit includes two front and rear glass plates capable of seeing through the game area 26 and a holding frame for holding the outside of the two front and rear glass plates, and is detachably fixed to the back side of the front door 4. ..

The lower unit 56 has a substantially triangular shape in a plan view in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and the lower unit 56 has a first operation effect means 46 for the first operation effect and a game for launching by the launch means 25. An upper plate 52 for storing balls, a lower plate (surplus ball storage portion) 61 for storing surplus balls, and a lower cover 62 for covering the outer peripheral side of these are provided, and are above the first operation effect means 46. A firing handle 63 for firing operation is provided on the opposite side of the plate 52 and the lower plate 61.

The first operation effect means 46 is operated when executing the first operation effect, and as shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, a vertically movable operation button 64 that the player can press and operate downward. A rotary light emitting means 67 provided inside the operation button 64, a first detection switch 65 such as a proximity type capable of detecting the operation of the operation button 64, and a vibration means 66 for vibrating the operation button 64. , The lower unit 56 is arranged in the vertical direction at the center of the left and right sides on the front side.

When the first operation guidance image 40a is displayed on the first operation guidance display means 40, the player presses the operation button 64 while the first operation guidance image 40a is displayed. It is possible. Then, when the first detection switch 65 is turned on by pressing the operation button 64, the liquid crystal display means 28 executes a predetermined first operation effect by displaying a first operation effect image (not shown) or the like. , It has come to arouse the interest of the player in the game.

The operation button 64 constitutes an operation cover body that covers the internal rotating light emitting means 67, is made of transparent or translucent resin, and has a cylindrical body portion 68 and a step on the upper end side of the body portion 68. A spherical operation portion (operation top) 70 formed concentrically and cylindrically via the portion 69 is integrally provided, and the body portion 68 is fixed to the lower elevating plate 71. The elevating plate 71 is provided on the fixed base 72 so as to be able to move up and down via the guide rod 76, and is urged upward by a spring 77 such as a coil spring fitted to the guide rod 76.

The fixing base 72 is mounted on a fixing member 78 projecting forward from the door frame 55 in the front door 4. In the operation button 64, the operation unit 70 projects upward from the lower cover 62, and the rear side of the operation unit 70 is covered by the rear cover 79 on the lower cover 62 side. The lower cover 62 is provided with a U-shaped notch 80 on the front side of the body 68, and the notch 80 is provided with a transparent resin front cover 81 that covers the body 68 from the front side. ing.

The rotary light emitting means 67 is provided in the operation button 64, and is the first after the operation of the operation button 64 during the operable period from the operation of the operation button 64 to the operation of the operation button 64 by the player. When the required time such as during the operation effect is reached, the rotary light emitting means 67 rotates and emits light to illuminate the operation button 64 from the inside.

The rotary light emitting means 67 has a fixed LED substrate 83 on which a plurality of LEDs 82 are mounted on the upper surface, a transparent portion 84a and a red portion 84b in the rotation direction, and is rotatably provided on the outer periphery of the LED substrate 83. The spherical body 84 is provided, and the spherical body 84 rotates when the LED 82 emits light. Therefore, in synchronization with the rotation of the spherical body 84, the operation button 64 is changed to a white system from the inside via the transparent portion 84a and the red portion 84b. It emits light alternately with the red color. The transparent portion 84a and the red portion 84b have irregular reflection type irregularities so that the inside is difficult to see.

The spherical body 84 is rotatably supported by a support portion 86 on a fixed base 72 via cylindrical rotary shafts 85 arranged on both left and right sides, and is driven by a rotary drive motor 87 via a gear train 88 or the like. It rotates around 85. The LED substrate 83 is fixed to the support portion 86 of the fixing base 72 via a fixing shaft 89 inserted in the left and right rotating shafts 85.

The body portion 68 of the operation button 64 is provided with a notch portion 68a for inserting the rotating shaft 85 so as to be recessed upward from the lower end side to the operation portion 70 side in an inverted U shape. Therefore, even when the operation button 64 is pressed downward, the rotary light emitting means 67 does not move up and down. The lower cover 62 and the rear cover 79 are made of a light-shielding resin. The operation portion 70 and the body portion 68 of the operation button 64 and the front cover 81 have light transmission, and the rotary light emitting means 67 can be seen through from the front side.

As shown in FIG. 14, the operation button 64 has a resin pouring portion trace 90 at the time of molding on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the body portion 68, and is molded on the lower end surface of the body portion 68 and the lower surface of the step portion 69. There are traces of the extruded part 91a and 91b at the time. The resin pouring portion trace 90 is a trace of the resin pouring portion in which the molten resin is poured into the cavity from the resin pouring portion on the mold side at the time of molding, and is a substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the body portion 68 on the rear side of the body portion 68. , And other intermediate positions.

Here, the "resin pouring portion" will be briefly described. In addition, although the name "resin pouring part" often appears in the explanations so far and thereafter, the name "gate" which is universally used among those skilled in the art is used instead. Or (replace). Furthermore, the runner method (cold runner, hot runner) differs depending on the type of mold (2-plate mold, 3-plate mold), but there are several methods for pouring resin according to these, so the "gate" The names may be further subdivided as follows.

(1) Direct gate (2-plate mold)
The advantages are "less pressure loss due to the gate" and "simple structure, low cost and hard to break". On the other hand, the disadvantages are that "gate cut is required in the post-process", "the gate cut mark is large", "many pieces cannot be taken", and "multi-point cannot be made".

(2) Side gate (2-plate mold)
The advantages are "the pressure loss due to the gate is relatively small" and "the structure is simple, inexpensive and hard to break". On the other hand, the disadvantages are that "gate cutting is required in the post-process" and "gate marks remain".

(3) Submarine gate (2-plate mold)
The advantage is that "gate cutting is not required in the post-process". On the other hand, the disadvantages are that "it can be installed only on the side" and "the gate mark is not convex but dirty".

(4) Pin gate (3 plate mold)
The advantages are that "gate cutting is not required in the post-process", "gate marks are small and inconspicuous", "multi-point / multi-piece removal is easy", and "uniform pressure distribution can be easily obtained". On the other hand, the disadvantages are that "the amount of material used is large because the runner is long", "the mold size is large", and "the structure is complicated and expensive".

The extruded portion traces 91a and 91b are traces of the extruded portion such as an extruded pin contacting the molded product during die cutting, and are spaced apart from the lower end surface of the body portion 68 and the lower surface of the step portion 69 in the circumferential direction. Multiple are arranged. The extruded portion trace 91b on the lower surface of the step portion 69 has a circular shape, and the extruded portion trace 91a on the lower end surface of the body portion 68 has a semicircular shape smaller than the extruded portion trace 91b on the step portion 69 side. Therefore, at the time of molding, two types of extrusion portions having different sizes are used according to the conditions of each extrusion position of the operation button 64.

Here, the "extruded portion trace" will be briefly described. In addition, although the name "extruded part trace" often appears in the explanations so far and the following explanations, instead of this, "extruded pin traces, ejectors" which are universally used among those skilled in the art (extruded pin traces, ejectors) The name "Ejector) pin trace" may be used (replaced). Further, in this case, what corresponds to the "extrusion means" is an "extrusion pin (also synonymous with an extrusion pin), an ejector pin".

When molding the resin of the operation button 64, as shown in FIG. 15, the resin pouring portion corresponding to the resin pouring portion trace 90 melts into the cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold in the direction indicated by the arrow 90a. The resin is poured and molded into a predetermined operation button shape. The resin pouring portion trace 90 is located at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the body portion 68, and the molten resin is poured in the radial direction (90a arrow direction) from the resin pouring portion corresponding to the resin pouring portion trace 90. Therefore, it is possible to pour the molten resin substantially uniformly into the entire cavity at the time of molding, and it is possible to prevent the generation of weld lines due to the merging of the molten resins.

Here, the "weld line" will be briefly described. If a pin or core is provided in the molded product to form a hollow part, the resin will diverge in that part, and when it goes around that part, it will rejoin, so a thin line ( Line) will occur. In resin molding, the "thin line generated at the portion where the flow of molten resin merges and is fused in the mold" is the weld line, but it may also be referred to as a weld line or a weld line.

The name "weld line" often appears in the explanations so far and thereafter, but instead of this, "a line that can occur at the resin confluence (during resin molding)" or "resin". It may be expressed as "merging line, resin merging line" or the like. The process until the weld line is formed is shown below.

As shown in FIG. 15, the molten resin poured from the resin pouring portion in the radial direction 90a arrow indicates the left-right direction (90b arrow direction, 90c arrow) in the entire cavity on the back side of the body portion 68 from the resin pouring portion. It flows substantially uniformly and radially in the indicated direction) and the vertical direction (90d arrow indicating direction, 90e arrow indicating direction). For example, the molten resin flows from the resin pouring portion into the cavity of the body portion 68 in the left-right direction (90b arrow direction, 90c arrow pointing direction), and flows from the resin pouring portion into the cavity of the body portion 68 in the vertical direction (90d arrow). Flows in the indicated direction (90e arrow indicated direction).

However, when the molten resin flowing in the left-right direction (90b arrow direction, 90c arrow direction) reaches the left and right notches (flow obstruction) 68a on the front side thereof, the notch 68a moves the molten resin forward. Since the flow is hindered, the molten resin does not flow from both the left and right sides to the front side of the body portion 68 beyond the notch portion 68a. On the other hand, the molten resin flowing upward (in the direction indicated by the arrow 90d) is in a state of communicating with the front side of the body portion 68 via the top side of the operation portion 70 between the left and right notch portions 68a of the cavity. It flows to the front side of the body portion 68 through the top side of the operation portion 70 between the left and right notch portions 68a.

When the molten resin in the cavity is cured, the mold is opened after that, and the molded product is extruded by the extruded portion on the movable mold side to be removed from the movable mold. A plurality of extruded portion traces 91a and 91b are arranged in the circumferential direction on the lower end surface of the body portion 68 of the operation button 64 and the lower surface of the step portion 69, and the extruding portion of each extruded portion corresponding to the extruded portion traces 91a and 91b is extruded. Therefore, the molded product of the operation button 64 can be easily removed from the movable mold.

After that, if the runner or the like is cut with a tool, a predetermined operation button 64 can be obtained, and the operation button 64 has a resin pouring portion trace 90 having a shape corresponding to the resin pouring portion on the outer periphery of the body portion 68. Remaining, recessed extruded portion traces 91a and 91b remain on the lower end surface of the body portion 68 and the lower surface of the step portion 69.

By injection molding the operation button 64 in this way, the molten resin separated into two hands does not merge in the cavity for the operation button 64, and the generation of a weld line can be prevented. Therefore, the strength of the operation button 64 is improved, and even when the player during the game frequently hits or presses the operation button 64, the strength sufficient to withstand the impact can be secured.

Moreover, although the resin pouring portion trace 90 having a shape corresponding to the resin pouring portion remains, the resin pouring portion trace 90 is at one place, and since it is the rear part of the body portion 68, the weld line does not occur. Therefore, the aesthetic appearance of the operation button 64 is improved. Further, recessed extruded portion traces 91a and 91b remain on the lower end surface of the body portion 68 and the lower surface of the step portion 69, but the extruded portion trace 91b on the step portion 69 side is large depending on the shape and structure of the operation button 64. Since the extruded portion trace 91a on the lower end side of the body portion 68 is small, the extruded portion can be arranged according to the portion of the operation button 64.

The first upper unit 57 includes a side cover 93 on the front side that is long in the vertical direction and an LED-type light emitting effect means (not shown) arranged on the back side of the side cover 93, and emits light at a predetermined effect. A predetermined portion of the side cover 93 emits light by the light from the means.

As shown in FIG. 10, the second upper unit 58 is reinforced by a sheet metal reinforcing frame 94 formed in an L-shape in the front view from the upper side to the right side of the viewing window 53 and the upper side of the viewing window 53. Horizontal main body 95 mounted on the front surface of the frame 94, vertical vertical main body 96 mounted on the front surface of the reinforcing frame 94 on the right side of the viewing window 53, and front and rear at the center of the horizontal main body 95. A movable effect means 97 arranged so as to be movable in a direction and a second operation effect means 47 arranged at a substantially central portion above and below the vertical main body 96 are provided, and mounting means such as an engaging means 98 and a fastening means 99 are provided. It is detachably attached to the front surface of the door frame 55 via.

The second upper unit 58 is detachably attached to the front side of the door frame 55 of the front door 4 via the engaging means 98 and the fastening means 99. The engaging means 98 and the fastening means 99 are dispersedly arranged at a plurality of locations between both end portions of the L-shaped reinforcing frame 94 and the intermediate portions thereof. As shown in FIG. 16, each engaging means 98 includes an engaging hook 100 projecting from the reinforcing frame 94 to the back side, and the engaging hook 100 is inserted into the through hole 101 of the door frame 55 to form the door frame 55. It is designed to engage with the engaged portion 102 so as to be engaged and disengaged from above. Further, among the plurality of engaging means 98, one of the engaging means 98 is provided with a clamping means 103 for tightening the engaging means 98 in an engaged state so as not to be disengaged.

The clamp means 103 is connected to the clamp lever 106 rotatably pivotally attached to the attachment portion 104 of the door frame 55 by the pivot shaft 105, and is connected to the engagement hook 100 from above by the connecting shaft 107 in the middle of the clamp lever 106. It has a clamp tool 108 provided so as to be engageable and disengageable, and in a state where the clamp tool 108 is engaged with the engagement hook 100, the clamp lever 106 is rotated downward around the pivot 105. When the clamp lever 106 is rotated around the pivot 105 until the connecting shaft 107 exceeds the extension line connecting the engagement position of the clamp 108 with respect to the engagement hook 100 and the pivot 105 toward the door frame 55, the engaging means The 98 is designed to be irreversibly tightened. The clamp means 103 releases the tightening of the engaging means 98 when the clamp lever 106 is rotated around the pivot 105 in the opposite direction.

As shown in FIG. 17, the fastening means 99 includes a fastening screw 110 inserted through the door frame 55 from the mounting portion 113 on the back side of the door frame 55, and operates the knob portion 111 of the fastening screw 110 to the tip end side thereof. Is screwed into the screw hole 112 on the reinforcing frame 94 side, and the reinforcing frame 94 is tightened on the door frame 55 side by the fastening screw 110. A resin door plate is mounted on the front surface of the door frame 55.

When attaching the second upper unit 58 to the door frame 55, first, the second upper unit 58 is arranged on the front side of the door frame 55, and the engaging hook 100 of each engaging means 98 is engaged with the door frame 55. Engage with portion 102. Next, the engaging hook 100 is clamped by the clamping means 103 corresponding to any of the engaging means 98 on the back side of the door frame 55, and the engaging means 98 is tightened so as not to be disengaged. Finally, the fastening screw 110 of the fastening means 99 is operated from the back side of the door frame 55 to fasten the reinforcing frame 94 of the second upper unit 58 to the door frame 55 side. When removing the second upper unit 58, the procedure is reversed.

The horizontal main body portion 95 and the vertical main body portion 96 are provided so as to project forward from the reinforcing frame 94, and a light emitting effect means such as an LED type is incorporated therein.

The movable effect means 97 has a movable effect body 114 configured to imitate the head and front wings of the "butterfly" and arranged forward, and the movable effect body 114 is supported from the back side and the movable effect body 114 is the origin. It is provided with an effect body driving means 115 for driving the movable effect body 114 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction between the position 114A and the forward position 114B, and a vibrating means (not shown) for vibrating the movable effect body 114.

In the movable effect means 97, the movable effect body 114 is normally located at the origin position 114A, and during the second operation effect, the movable effect body 114 advances once or a plurality of times between the origin position 114A and the advance position 114B. A plurality of effect operations, that is, a moving effect operation of retreating and a vibration effect operation in which the movable effect body 114 vibrates back and forth at the origin position 114A and / or the forward position 114B, are selectively performed. ing. The movable effect body 114 may be stopped at the forward position 114B for a predetermined time and then returned to the origin position 114A.

As shown in FIG. 18, the movable effect means 97 has a protruding position 114C protruding upward from the upper surface of the horizontal main body 95, and a storage position 114D that fits within the projection area of the inner frame 3 in the front-rear direction as shown in FIG. It can rotate around a rotation axis (not shown) in the front-rear direction. The movable effect means 97 can be locked at each position of the protruding position 114C and the storage position 114D by the locking means (not shown).

By providing the movable effect means 97 so that the posture can be changed between the protruding position 114C and the storage position 114D in this way, when the gaming machine 1 is stored and packed in the packing case, the movable effect means 97 is stored in the storage position. It can be compactly stored in the 114D, and after being installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the movable effect means 97 can be used in a state of being projected to the protruding position 114C.

The second operation effect means 47 is operated when the second operation effect is executed, and is arranged at the front end thereof and at the origin position 118A from the front side to the rear as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. An operation unit 118 that can be pressed, an operation unit driving means 119 that supports the operation unit 118 from the back side and drives the operation unit 118 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction between the origin position 118A and the forward position 118B, and an origin. It includes a second detection switch (not shown) that detects the pressing operation of the operation unit 118 at the position 118A. The operation unit driving means 119 has a predetermined play that allows the operation unit 118 on the origin position 118A side to be pressed backward, and the operation unit 118 is forwardly moved to the origin position 118A by the urging means within the range of the play. Being urged.

The second operation effect means 47 has two operations: a movement operation in which the operation unit 118 moves back and forth between the origin position 118A and the forward position 118B, and a pressing operation in which the operation unit 118 is pressed on the origin position 118A side. For example, when the second operation guidance image 41a is displayed on the second operation guidance display means 41, the player operates the second operation guidance means 47 during the display period of the second operation guidance image 41a. When the unit 118 is pressed, the movable effect means 97 performs an effect operation of moving back and forth between the origin position 118A and the forward position 118B, and the liquid crystal display means 28 performs a second operation effect in synchronization with the movable effect. A predetermined second operation effect is executed by displaying an image (not shown) or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2, and 10, the front door 4 is provided with first to fifth warning display means 120 to 124 at required locations. The first caution display means 120 displays precautions regarding the assembly of the movable effect means 97 to the game machine installer, and is located near the movable effect means 97 on the upper surface of the lateral main body 95 of the second upper unit 58. It is provided in. The second warning display means 121 directly or indirectly displays the precautions regarding the assembly of the second upper unit 58 to the game machine installer, and is on the right side of the vertical main body 96 of the second upper unit 58. It is provided on the upper side.

The third caution display means 122 directly or indirectly displays the precautions regarding the operation of the movable effect means 97 to the player, and the movable effect means on the front side surface of the vertical main body 96 of the second upper unit 58. It is provided near the lower side of 97. The fourth caution display means 123 directly or indirectly displays the precautions regarding the operation of the second operation effect means 47 to the player, and is provided in the vicinity of the lower side of the second operation effect means 47. .. The fifth caution display means 124 directly or indirectly displays the precautions regarding the operation of the first operation effect means 46 to the player, and the first operation effect means 46 is displayed on the front surface or the upper surface of the lower cover 62. It is provided in the vicinity.

The first caution display means 120 relates to an assembly work of assembling the movable effect body 114 of the movable effect means 97 in a protruding state, except for some precautions related to less important work when there are a plurality of work steps. Display and call attention to important work process precautions. For example, when installing the game machine 1 on the island equipment, after attaching the package of the game machine 1 to the island equipment, the movable effect body 114 is unlocked by the locking means at the storage position 114D, and the movable effect body 114 is released. It is necessary to perform each assembly work of rotating the movable effect body 114 from the storage position 114D to the protruding position 114C around the front-rear axis and locking the movable effect body 114 again by the locking means so as not to rotate at the protruding position 114C.

Therefore, the first alert display means 120 "1. unlocks the movable effect body at the stored position. 2. rotates the movable effect body to the protruding position. 3. locks the movable effect body at the protruding position." When it is necessary to set the movable effect body 114 at the protruding position 114C through a plurality of work processes as in the above, the movable effect body except for some precautions regarding less important work such as a self-explanatory work process. Precautions regarding important work that should be noted when setting 114 safely are displayed, and the displayed items call attention to the operator.

If the important assembly work process when assembling the movable effect body 114 in the protruding state is explicitly displayed by the first alert display means 120 arranged in the vicinity of the movable effect means 97 in this way, the operator Can easily grasp which work process should be paid attention to when assembling the movable effect body 114, and is safe by proceeding according to the precautions of the first caution display means 120. Moreover, the movable effect body 114 can be efficiently set in the protruding state.

Further, the first caution display means 120 displays precautions related to important work for safely setting the movable effect body 114, except for precautions related to less important work such as a self-explanatory work process. Therefore, it is possible to display indispensable precautions in an easy-to-understand manner in the limited display area of the first alert display means 120 as compared with the case where all the matters are covered in detail. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of work mistakes of the operator as much as possible. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the size of the first alert display means 120, it does not spoil the aesthetic appearance of the entire gaming machine 1.

Moreover, since the movable effect body 114 is provided on the second upper unit 58 and the second upper unit 58 is removable from the door frame 55, the first caution display means 120 is also the movable effect body 114. Similarly, by providing the second upper unit 58, even when the second upper unit 58 is removed from the window frame, the movable effect body 114 and the first alert display means 120 do not become separate, and the first There is an advantage that the display related to the movable effect body 114 of the caution display means 120 can be easily confirmed at any time, and the management becomes easy.

The second caution display means 121 displays precautions regarding mounting work when mounting the second upper unit 58 on the door frame 55. When the second upper unit 58 is attached to the door frame 55, the second upper unit 58 is arranged on the front side of the door frame 55, and the engaging hook 100 of each engaging means 98 is engaged with the door frame 55. After engaging with the portion 102, the engaging hook 100 is clamped by the clamping means 103 corresponding to any of the engaging means 98 on the back side of the door frame 55 to tighten the engaging means 98 so as not to be disengaged, and finally. The fastening screw 110 of the fastening means 99 is operated from the back side of the door frame 55 to fasten the reinforcing plate of the second upper unit 58 to the door frame 55 side.

Therefore, the second caution display means 121 states, "1. Engage the engaging means with the door frame. 2. Clamp the engaging means with the clamping means. 3. Fasten the second upper unit to the door frame side with the fastening screw. When it is necessary to mount the second upper unit 58 on the front side of the door frame 55 through a plurality of work processes, some precautions regarding less important work such as a self-explanatory work process. Except for, the precautions regarding important work to be noted in safely mounting the second upper unit 58 are displayed, and the operator is alerted by the displayed items. Therefore, the same effect as that of the first alert display means 120 can be obtained.

The third caution display means 122 is provided on the front side surface of the lateral main body portion 95 of the second upper unit 58 near the lower side of the movable effect means 97. Since the movable effect body 114 of the movable effect means 97 moves back and forth between the origin position 114A and the forward position 114B, if the player in the game stands up when the movable effect body 114 is located at the forward position 114B, the movable effect body 114 moves forward. There is a fear of hitting the head with the movable directing body 114 at the position 114B. Therefore, on the third warning display means 122, along with a warning display such as "Caution overhead!", Precautions for moving the movable effect body 114 back and forth or for the movable effect body 114 at the forward position 114B are displayed by characters, figures, etc. The display is designed to draw the player's attention.

The fourth caution display means 123 is provided on the front side surface of the vertical main body 96 of the second upper unit 58 near the lower side of the second operation effect means 47. Since the operation unit 118 of the second operation effect means 47 moves back and forth between the origin position 118A and the forward position 118B, when operating the operation unit 118, a finger is moved between the front surface of the vertical main body 96. There is a fear of pinching. Therefore, the fourth warning display means 123 displays warnings such as "Caution for pinching fingers!" And precautions for pinching fingers by characters, figures, etc., and is displayed around the second operation effect means 47. It is affixed in the vicinity.

When the operation unit 118 of the second operation effect means 47 is located at the forward position 118B, if there is a risk that the player's body, arms, etc. may come into contact with the operation unit 118, the fourth caution display means. Different notes may be displayed on 123. Different precautions regarding the operation unit 118 may be displayed individually or separately.

The fifth caution display means 124 is provided on the lower cover 62 in the vicinity of the first operation effect means 46. For example, the first operation effect means 46 has three operations: a first operation of up and down operation by pressing the operation button 64, a second operation of rotation light emission operation by the rotary light emitting means 67, and a third operation of vibration operation by the vibration means 66. It is possible. In such a case, the fifth caution display means 124 directly or indirectly displays cautions regarding the operation of the first operation effect means 46 to call the player's attention, but among the three movements, The attention-calling information of the first movement, which has a high degree of attention to the player, is displayed without displaying the movements having a low degree of attention to the player such as the second movement and the third movement.

When the first operation effect means 46 performs a plurality of operations of the first to third operations, if all the attention information for each operation is displayed on the fifth attention display means 124, the attention by displaying the attention information is displayed. The effectiveness of the arousal effect is rather reduced. That is, even if the fifth warning display means 124 is provided on the lower cover 62 on the front surface of the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3, the arrangement area is also limited in space, and it cannot be secured indefinitely. Therefore, if all the alert information for each operation of the first operation effect means 46 that performs the first to third operations is displayed, the display of each alert information becomes too small and it becomes difficult for the player to confirm, and the alert is alerted. The effect of alerting by displaying information is rather reduced. However, if the fifth alert display means 124 displays the alert information of the first operation having a high degree of alert to the player, the player can accurately grasp the alert information.

The degree of alerting to the player may be determined by the amount of movement of the operation buttons 64 in the first to third operations. For example, the first operation of the up-and-down operation has a large amount of movement of the operation button 64, the second operation of the rotary light emission operation has no movement of the operation button 64, and the third operation of the vibration operation by the vibrating means 66 is the operation button 64. When the movement amount of the operation button 64 is small, the fifth attention warning display means 124 displays the warning information regarding the first operation in which the movement amount of the operation button 64 is large, as described above.

Since the operation button 64 of the first operation effect means 46 is made of resin and may be damaged if a large impact force is applied, the fifth caution display means 124 may include "Caution for damage to the operation button!" Along with the warning display, precautions regarding damage to the operation button 64 may be displayed by characters, figures, or the like. In this case, it can be said that the precautions regarding the damage of the operation button 64 are the alert information having a high degree of alert to the player.

Also in the movable effect means 97, the first operation in which the movable effect body 114 moves between the origin position 114A and the forward position 114B, and the movable effect body 114 vibrates at the origin position 114A and / or the forward position 114B. Since two movements of two movements are performed, when displaying the warning information by the third warning display means 122, the second movement with a small movement amount is not displayed, and the first movement with a large movement amount is noted. The arousal information may be displayed.

When the fourth warning display means 123 displays the warning information regarding the second operation effect means 47, the same configuration may be used.

It should be noted that the warning display means 120 to 124 are generally composed of a display sheet on which precautions are printed, and the display sheet is generally attached to a predetermined place by adhesive, adhesive, etc., but caution is given instead of the display sheet. A reminder display or other reminder information may be displayed by printing, engraving, or the like. Further, the alert information displayed on the third to fifth alert display means 122 to 124 may be any one that calls attention to safety precautions and characteristic matters in operation or operation of the target location. ..

Here, the disclosure of the alert information to the player or the game machine installer will be described.

<1. Calling attention to players>

<1-1> When there are a plurality of movements in the same movable body For example, in the movable effect means 97, as the effect operations, an operation in which the movable effect body 114 pops out toward the front (first operation) and a front surface of the movable effect body 114. Consider the case where there are two light emitting operations (second operation) in which the light emitting unit on the side emits light. As a potential risk of the first movement of the movable effect body 114, a player who does not know the existence of the first movement places a wallet, a cigarette, or other small item on the movable effect body 114, or is placed above the game machine. It is conceivable that small items may fall from the movable effector 114 or the hand may hit the movable effector 114 when performing actions such as reaching out to see the data display on the Tajima facility side. ..

Further, as a potential risk of the second movement of the light emitting unit, when a player who does not know the existence of the second movement makes a violent light emission at the timing of staring at the light emitting part of the movable effect means 97, he / she looks at the eyes. There is a risk of injury. However, it is widely known to players that a predetermined portion of a gaming machine emits light, and it can be said that the movable effect means 97 illuminates to some extent within an assumed range.

Therefore, when calling attention to the effect operation of the movable effect means 97, "movable (at least a part of the position changes)" and "light emission (at least a part of the color changes, or changes from an extinguished state to a lighting state)". , Or changes from a low-intensity light-emitting state to a high-intensity light-emitting state) ”, it can be said that the potential risk is greater if the“ movable ”is not known. As for the priority (“attention level”), “movable” is higher than “light emission”.

Therefore, the first alert display means 120 mainly displays the precautions regarding "movability" of the first operation having a high priority at least in a large size, and omits the precautions regarding "light emission" of the second operation having a low priority. Or display it small.

<1-2> When there are multiple movable bodies that perform the same type of operation As shown in 1-1, it can be said that "movable" has a higher potential risk than "light emission", but the same type of operation Even if it is (light emission, movable), it is possible that there is a difference or difference in the amount of movement (degree of movement).

For example, even when the operation type is "light emission", the former has a greater burden on the eyes and is higher in the case of changing from the off state to the lighting state and the case of changing from the low brightness light emission state to the high brightness light emission state. There is a big difference in the burden on the player between the case of high-intensity blinking and the case of lighting (non-blinking) or low-intensity low-speed blinking (gradation emission), such as the former having a greater burden on the eyes.

Furthermore, even when the movement type is "movable", there is a risk that the former will hit the hand or head when the movement amount is large (for example, moving 20 cm) and when the movement amount is small (for example, moving 5 cm). In addition, when the movable body pops out and when the movable body vibrates, the former has a higher risk of hitting the hand or head.

Therefore, even when alerting the player by the alert display means, if the same movable body has a plurality of motion modes in the same type of motion, the motion mode that gives a heavy burden to the eyes, or , Movement modes with a high risk of hitting the hand or head (those that may cause injury) have a higher priority for alerting than other movement modes. Therefore, when alerting by the alert display means, the alert regarding the operation mode having a high priority is preferentially displayed, and the operation mode having a low priority is omitted or displayed as a secondary small.

<1-3> When there are a plurality of movable bodies performing the same type of operation In 1-2, a case where there are a plurality of movement modes of the same type in one movable body has been described, but here, the same type of operation is performed. A case where there are a plurality of movable bodies (or effectors) will be described.

For example, when the operation type is "light emission", it is assumed that two or more movable bodies may perform substantially the same light emission operation (high-speed blinking, high-intensity lighting, change from off state to light emission state, etc.). A movable body located near the line of sight (for example, a movable body provided on the front side surface side of the gaming machine frame as in the second operation effect means 47) and a movable body located far from the player's line of sight (for example,). , A movable body provided in the upper part of the gaming machine frame such as the movable effect means 97, or a movable body provided in the lower part of the game machine frame such as the first operation effect means 46), the former is more eye-catching. The burden on the slingshot is large.

Further, when the movement type is "movable", it is assumed that two or more movable bodies may perform substantially the same movable movement (movement, rotation, vibration), and the movable body moving in the front-rear direction (for example, the second operation). There is a higher risk of the former hitting the head between the effect means 47) and the movable body that moves in the vertical direction (for example, the first operation effect means 46) (comparison when both do not recognize the movement). .. Similarly for rotation and vibration, the risk of pinching your hands or hitting your head depends on the size of the movable body itself and the relationship with the surrounding structures (flat or uneven, etc.). Can be defined.

Therefore, even when the same type of movement is performed by a plurality of movable bodies, those that place a heavy burden on the player have a high priority when the caution display means is used to call the attention. Therefore, the effect operation having a high priority is displayed preferentially, and the effect operation having a low priority is omitted or displayed as a secondary effect.

<2. Calling attention to game machine installers>
The degree of alerting to the game machine installer is different from that to the player mentioned above. When installing a gaming machine, of course, the power is not turned on, and the above-mentioned "light emission" and "movable" operations are not performed. The power may be turned on to check the operation after installation, but here, the explanation will be made assuming that the power is not turned on.

<When assembling the parts of 2-1.1>
When assembling one member to the game machine frame, etc., in principle, it is not necessary to call attention to the assembly order, and to call attention to injuries during work of the game machine installer, such as "Be careful of pinching fingers!" Is prioritized.

When assembling one member through multiple steps such as moving it up (or down) and then moving it to the left (or right) from that position and fixing it, be careful about the assembly order. Matters may be prioritized, and precautions for injuries during work may be secondary.

<When assembling 2-2.2 or more members in a predetermined order>
When assembling two or more members in a predetermined order with respect to a gaming machine frame, etc., on the contrary, the priority for alerting such as "caution for pinching fingers" becomes lower, and each member such as "caution for assembly order!" The priority of calling attention to the assembly order is high. Therefore, the precautions for the assembly order are displayed preferentially, and the precautions such as "caution for pinching fingers" are displayed secondarily.

<3. Warning display means for players and warning display means for game machine installers>

<3-1. Difference in the number of warning display means>
The number of warning display means for the player is made larger than the number of warning display means for the game machine installer. The reason is that since the game machine installer describes the precautions in the "instruction manual", the warning display means placed on the game machine can be suppressed to the minimum necessary, but for the player. This is because there is only a place to call attention on the gaming machine, so the number of warning display means required increases. Another reason is that only one type (one action) of alerting is performed for one alerting display means in order to reduce the size of one alerting display means so as not to spoil the aesthetic appearance as much as possible. It is also for the sake of.

<3-2. Difference in the position of the alert display means>
The warning display means for the player is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the warning display means for the game machine installer is arranged on the side surface (upper, left and right, etc.) of the gaming machine. Further, the warning display means for the game machine installer may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized only when the door is opened.

<3-3. Difference in size of alert display means>
The attention-calling display means for the player should not spoil the aesthetics while having the attention-calling power, and the caution-calling display means for the game machine installer emphasizes the attention-calling power rather than the aesthetics. Further, since the warning display means for the game machine installer is in a position invisible (or difficult to see) from the player, one warning display means may be used for a plurality of different warning targets. The alert items may be displayed, or a plurality of alert items for one alert target may be displayed. For example, the display of "caution for pinching fingers" and the display of "caution for assembly order" are performed by the caution display means such as the printed matter of 1.

<3-4. Difference in display method of alert display>
The warning display means for the player may be a position that can be seen by the player. For example, if it is displayed with a sticker of a type that can be easily peeled off, it may be peeled off intentionally or by mistake. Therefore, various measures can be considered, such as adopting a seal having higher adhesive strength, coating the surface so that it cannot be touched by hand, and so on.

On the other hand, the warning display means for the game machine installer is basically only seen by the game machine installer, and once installed, the work of reassembling afterwards does not occur very often, so at least it is a mistake. It is unlikely that it will come off. Therefore, the effect of cost reduction can be expected by adopting a general sticker or the like whose adhesiveness is not so high as compared with the warning display means for the player.

As another countermeasure, the caution display means for the player is covered with a convex portion (not all four sides), or only the caution display area of the caution display means is a concave portion lower than the surrounding. It is also conceivable to take measures against peeling. In this case as well, the effect of cost reduction can be expected by differentiating the warning display for the game machine installer according to the person to be alerted, such as not taking the same measures.

As described above, the countermeasure method may be divided according to the person to be alerted, or the countermeasure method may be divided according to the content of the alert (for example, the alert display means for movement is provided with countermeasures to alert the light emission. Measures are not taken for the display means, etc.), and the countermeasures are divided according to the place to call attention (for example, measures are taken for the warning display means displayed in the frame, and measures are taken for the warning display means displayed on the board. No etc.)

The front door 4 is a glass door on the upper side provided with a viewing window 53, a glass unit, etc., and an opening / closing door on the lower side provided with an operation effect means, an upper plate 52, a lower plate 61, a firing handle 63, and the like. It is also possible to divide the glass door into two parts so that the glass door and the opening / closing door are separately opened / closed around the second hinge means 7 on substantially the same axis.

As shown in FIG. 9, a back mounting base 127 and a ball collecting case 128 are vertically mounted on the back side of the game board 16. On the back mounting base 127, a liquid crystal display means 28 arranged to face the rear of the display window 29a of the center case 29, and a movable effect means (not shown) arranged between the game board 16 and the liquid crystal display means 28. ) And are attached. Further, the back mounting base 127 has a cover portion 127a on the lower side, and the cover portion 127a projects from the game board 16 such as the special symbol starting means 31, the variable winning means 32, and the normal winning means 33 to the back side. (Not shown) is covered from the back side.

The liquid crystal display means 28 is housed in a protective case 129 and is detachably fixed to a liquid crystal mounting portion 130 on the back side of the back mounting base 127. The ball collecting case 128 is for collecting the game balls guided to the back side of the game board 16 by winning the special symbol starting means 31, the variable winning means 32, the ordinary winning means 33, etc., and as shown in FIG. The upper side of the rear wall portion 128a is arranged so as to overlap the back side of the cover portion 127a of the back mounting base 127. The ball collecting case 128 is provided with a discharge port 128b for discharging the game ball downward, and the game ball is discharged from the discharge port 128b to the outside of the machine through the discharge passage 131. The discharge passage 131 is provided in the vertical direction on the front side of the board mounting base 34.

On the back side of the game board 16, as shown in FIGS. 3, 9, 20, and 21, an effect board case 134 for accommodating the effect board 133 and a liquid crystal board 135 corresponding to the back side of the liquid crystal display means 28. The liquid crystal substrate case 136 for accommodating the main substrate 137 is arranged side by side, and the main substrate case 138 for accommodating the main substrate 137 is arranged on the back side of the ball collecting case 128 on the lower side thereof. The effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 are mounted on the back side of the back mounting base 127 and the ball collecting case 128, and the main board case 138 is mounted on the back side of the ball collecting case 128.

As shown in FIGS. 3, 9, 20, and 21, a board mounting base 34 provided with a discharge passage 131 is fixed to the back side of the lower mounting portion 15 of the inner frame 3, and the back side of the board mounting base 34 is fixed. The power supply board case 141 for accommodating the power supply board 140 and the payout board case 143 for accommodating the payout board 142 are arranged in front of and behind each other.

Each substrate case 134, 136, 138, 141, 143 is made of transparent resin, and the internal substrates 133, 135, 137, 140, 142 can be visually recognized from the back side. Further, the substrate cases 134, 136, 138, and 143 are protected by a transparent resin back cover 22, and the substrates 133, 135, 137, and 142 can be visually recognized from the back side of the back cover 22. There is.

The back cover 22 is an example of a protective cover made of colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 3, 8, 9, and 22, the back cover 22 projects rearward from the back protection portion 14 of the inner frame 3. Along the outer peripheral edge of the flat back surface 144 that covers the back components such as the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, the power supply board case 141, and the payout board case 143 from the back side, and the back surface portion 144. It is integrally provided with a peripheral portion 145 that is formed in a bent shape on the front side and protects back parts such as the effect substrate case 134, the liquid crystal substrate case 136, and the main substrate case 138 from the outer peripheral side. This is to ensure the rigidity of itself and to secure the security for the back parts such as the substrate cases 134, 136, 138, 141, 143 and the like. The back cover 22 is attached to the back side of the back protection portion 14 of the inner frame 3 so as to be openable and closable by the third hinge means 21 and the latch means 24. A plurality of third hinge means 21 and latch means 24 are provided in the vertical direction.

The back cover 22 secures a predetermined rigidity by integrally providing a peripheral edge portion 145 on the outer peripheral edge of the back surface portion 144. The peripheral edge portion 145 includes bent portions 145a, 145b on both the left and right sides, and bent portions 145c, 145d on both the upper and lower sides, and the bending length of the bent portions 145a, 145b, 145c, 145d to the front side is determined by the back protection portion 14 and the like. It is determined by the relative relationship with the mating member, and the bending length is partially different depending on the back protection portion 14 or the like so that the front end side abuts or approaches the back protection portion 14 or the like.

For example, the left and right bent portions 145a and 145b of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22 correspond to the magnitude of the amount of protrusion of the attachment portion 20a on one end side and the attachment portion 20b on the other end side of the back protection portion 14 in the rear direction. The bending length of the bent portion 145a on one end side corresponding to the mounting portion 20a on one end side of the back protection portion 14 to the front side is long, and the other end side corresponding to the mounting portion 20b on the other end side of the back protection portion 14 The bending length of the bent portion 145b to the front side is shortened.

As shown in FIG. 3, the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22 has upper and lower bent portions 145c and 145d in addition to the left and right bent portions 145a and 145b, and the upper bent portions 145c are the ball tank 48 and the guide rail 49. It is inclined substantially parallel to the bottom surface side of the back protection portion 14, and is in contact with the rear end of the upper wall portion 19 of the back protection portion 14. The upper wall portion 19 of the back protection portion 14 has an inclined rear end side on which the upper bent portion 145c of the back cover 22 abuts.

The bent portion 145d on the lower side of the back cover 22 is substantially horizontal and protrudes to the front side to the extent that a predetermined rigidity d of the back cover 22 can be secured. An outside air introduction portion 146 is formed between the lower bent portion 145d and the board mounting base 34, and the outside air is introduced from the outside air introduction portion 146 to raise the inside of the back cover 22, which will be described later. It is designed to dissipate heat from heat-generating electronic components. The bent portion 145d on the lower side of the back cover 22 does not have to be substantially horizontal.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the back cover 22 is in a closed state in which the main board case 138 or the like is covered from the back side in contact with or close to the back side of the back protection portion 14, and the back side of the main board case 138 or the like is opened. It can be opened and closed around the third hinge means 21 in the open state. Further, the back cover 22 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame 3 by attaching and detaching the third hinge means 21 up and down in the open state, and the back cover 22 is placed between the back cover 22 side and the inner frame 3 side. Regulatory means 149 for restricting attachment / detachment are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, when the back cover 22 is opened around the third hinge means 21 from the closed position 22A, the regulating means 149 is used when the opening angle of the back cover 22 is less than a predetermined angle α1. Restricts the back cover 22 to be non-detachable, releases the restriction on the back cover 22 when the back cover 22 is opened to a predetermined angle α1 or more and is located at the detachable position 22B, and separates the third hinge means 21 vertically. The back cover 22 can be removed from the game machine main bodies 2 and 3.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the regulating means 149 is arranged at the upper bent portion 145c of the back cover 22 and the guide rail 49 arranged near the upper side of the back cover 22 and projecting rearward from the back cover 22. It is composed of and. When the back cover 22 is less than the predetermined angle α1, the bent portion 145c of the back cover 22 is under the guide rail 49 to restrict the back cover 22 from being detachable, and the back cover 22 has the predetermined angle α1. When the back cover 22 is opened and located at the attachment / detachment position 22B, the bent portion 145c of the back cover 22 retracts rearward from the guide rail 49 to release the restriction on the back cover 22.

The back cover 22 has a structure in which a flat back surface portion 144 and a peripheral edge portion 145 that bends from the outer periphery of the back surface portion 144 to the front side are integrally provided. In addition to covering the back parts such as 141 and 143 from the back side, the back parts such as the board case 134 are protected from the outer peripheral side by the peripheral edge portion 145 that bends from the outer peripheral side of the back surface portion 144 to the front side to ensure security. ing.

Therefore, when the back cover 22 is opened to a predetermined angle α1 or more and is located at the attachment / detachment position 22B, the upper side of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22 is retracted to a position where it is detached rearward from the guide rail 49, and the peripheral edge of the back cover 22 is retracted. The lower side of the portion 145 is retracted to a position where it can be detached rearward from the back component such as the board case 134, so that the peripheral edge portion 145 does not interfere with the back mechanism even if the back cover 22 is moved upward.

Therefore, when removing the back cover 22, after releasing the latch means 24, the back cover 22 is moved around the third hinge means 21 until the upper bent portion 145c of the back cover 22 comes off from the guide rail 49 rearward. The back cover 22 may be lifted to the rear at a predetermined angle α1 or more, and the third hinge means 21 may be separated into upper and lower parts and pulled out.

This is because even if the back cover 22 is opened around the third hinge means 21, if the back cover 22 is less than the predetermined angle α1, the back cover 22 is under the guide rail 49 even if the back cover 22 is lifted, and the back cover 22 is located on the back side. The upper bent portion 145c of the cover 22 comes into contact with the lower surface side of the guide rail 49, and the regulating means 149 restricts the removal of the back cover 22. Therefore, the back cover 22 is lifted until the third hinge means 21 is separated into upper and lower parts. Can't.

If the back cover 22 is opened to a predetermined angle α1 or more and is located rearward from the attachment / detachment position 22B, the back cover 22 will come off rearward from the rear end of the guide rail 49, and even if the back cover 22 is lifted, the guide rail 49 Since it does not hit the lower side and the regulation of the regulating means 149 on the back cover 22 can be released, the back cover 22 can be removed. When the back cover 22 is attached, the reverse operation is performed.

In this way, when the opening angle of the back cover 22 is less than the predetermined angle α1, the regulation means 149 restricts the removal of the back cover 22, and when the back cover 22 is opened by the predetermined angle α1 or more, the regulating means 149 regulates the removal. The regulation of the back cover 22 is released so that the back cover 22 can be removed. As a result, when the back cover 22 is removed, it is possible to prevent interference with back parts such as the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, and the payout board case 143 of the peripheral portion 145. Further, since the guide rail 49 is used as the regulating means 149, it can be structurally simplified as compared with the case where a dedicated regulating means is provided.

When the back side mechanism 17 of the main board case 138 or the like is maintained / inspected with the game machine 1 mounted on the island equipment 150 of the game hall, the inner frame 3 is as shown in FIG. 26-1. It is necessary to open the back cover 22 around the first hinge means 6 and wrap around the back side of the inner frame 3 in that state by opening the back cover 22 around the third hinge means 21.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 21, if the first hinge means 6 that supports the inner frame 3 and the third hinge means 21 that supports the back cover 22 are on opposite sides, the back side mechanism 17 is on the front side. Since there is a cover 22, a worker enters between the back cover 22 and the island equipment 150 to perform maintenance / inspection work. This is also the case when the illicit operator removes the main board case 138 and performs the illicit operation, and the illicit operator gets in between the back cover 22 and the island equipment 150 which are in the open state as at the time of inspection. There is a need. Therefore, if the back cover 22 is opened, it becomes very noticeable, so that there is an advantage that it is possible to prevent an illegal work performed by opening the back cover 22, such as an illegal work on the main board 137.

The bent portion 145b on the other end side of the back cover 22 is fixed to the mounting portion 20b of the side wall portion 18 of the back protection portion 14 by the latch means 24 arranged at the contact portions 152 on both the upper and lower ends thereof. The latch means 24 is a push-pull type, and as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, it is arranged at the contact portion 152 of the bent portion 145b of the back cover 22 and in the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b of the back protection portion 14. It includes an engaging body 154 that engages with each other so as to be engaged and disengaged from the inner peripheral side, and an operating body 155 that is inserted into the engaging body 154 so that it can be pushed and pulled.

The engaging body 154 includes a body portion 157 inserted into the through hole 156 of the contact portion 152, a flange portion 158 formed on the rear end side of the body portion 157 and abutting on the back surface of the contact portion 152, and a body portion 157. It is provided on the front end side of the mounting hole 153 so as to be expandable and contractible, and has a plurality of engaging claws 159 in the circumferential direction in which the outer peripheral surface engages with the front side of the mounting hole 153 when expanded.

The operating body 155 is a push-pull that is provided on the rear end side of the operating shaft portion 160 inserted through the body portion 157 and the flange portion 158 of the engaging body 154 and the operating shaft portion 160 and is capable of contacting the back surface of the flange portion 158. When the operation unit 161 and the operation unit 161 provided at the front end of the operation shaft unit 160 and the operation unit 161 are pushed to the pushing position 161A, the engaging claw 159 is expanded outward and the operation part 161 is pulled out to the pull-out position 161B. It sometimes has an expansion / contraction portion 162 that reduces the engaging claw 159 inward. The operating body 155 does not fall off from the engaging body 154.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the operating body 155 is pushed to the pushing position 161A, the rear end of the operating portion 161 is located in front of the back surface of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22. Further, when the operating body 155 is pulled out to the pull-out position 161B, the rear end of the operating portion 161 is substantially the same height as the back surface of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, or slightly lower than the back surface of the back surface portion 144. ..

When the bent portion 145b of the back cover 22 is fixed to the attachment portion 20b of the back protection portion 14 by the latch means 24, the following is performed. If the operating body 155 of the latch means 24 is pulled out to the pull-out position 161B, when the engaging claw 159 is inserted into the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b, the engaging claw 159 is pressed against the inner circumference of the mounting hole 153. The engaging claw 159 of the engaging body 154 is inserted into the mounting hole 153. As a result, the bent portion 145b of the back cover 22 can be fixed to the mounting portion 20b of the back protection portion 14 by the latch means 24.

When the engaging claw 159 is pierced into the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b, the contact portion 152 of the back cover 22 comes into contact with the back surface of the mounting portion 20b, so that the operating portion 161 of the operating body 155 is pushed forward to the pushing position 161A. Push it in. At this time, since the expansion / contraction portion 162 of the operating body 155 expands the engaging claw 159 to the outside, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 27, the outer peripheral side of the engaging claw 159 is pressure-welded to the inner circumference of the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b. Then, the engaging body 154 connects the bent portion 145b of the back cover 22 and the mounting portion 20b of the back protection portion 14 back and forth. As a result, the bent portion 145b of the back cover 22 can be fixed to the mounting portion 20b of the back protection portion 14 by the latch means 24.

When the operating body 155 is pushed to the pushing position 161A, the rear end of the operating portion 161 is on the front side of the back surface of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, and the rear end of the operating unit 161 with respect to the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22. Is recessed so that the latching means 24 does not interfere with anything else.

When opening and closing the back cover 22, first, the fixing by the latch means 24 is released. In that case, the operation unit 161 of the operation body 155 is grasped by fingers, and the operation body 155 is pulled out to the pull-out position 161B. Then, the expansion / contraction portion 162 of the operating body 155 is disengaged from the engaging claw 159. Therefore, if the bent portion 145b side of the back cover 22 is pulled backward, the engaging claw 159 is disengaged from the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b, and the latch means 24 The fixing of the effect board case 134 can be released.

That is, when the operating body 155 is pulled out to the pull-out position 161B, the expansion / contraction portion 162 is disengaged from the engaging claw 159, so that the engaging claw 159 has its own elastic force or the elasticity of the joint portion between the engaging claw 159 and the body portion 157. It contracts inward by force, or the engaging claw 159 can be elastically deformed inward. Therefore, if the operating portion 161 is pulled further rearward, as shown in FIG. 28, the engaging claw 159 of the engaging body 154 is pulled out rearward from the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b. It can be released.

When the operating body 155 of the latch means 24 is pulled out to the rearward position 161B, the rear end of the operating body 161 of the operating body 155 is substantially the same height as the back surface of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, or the back surface portion 144. Since the operation unit 161 is slightly lower than the back surface of the back cover 22, the operation unit 161 does not get in the way as compared with the one protruding from the back surface of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22.

A plurality of three third hinge means 21 are provided in the vertical direction, and as shown in FIGS. 29 to 34, the hinge shaft 147 provided integrally with the bent portion 145a side on one end side of the back cover 22 and A hinge bearing 148 is provided integrally with the side wall portion 18a on one end side of the back protection portion 14 which is a support member and receives the hinge shaft 147, and the hinge shaft 147 is determined to be located on the vertical axis center in the vertical direction. Multiple pieces are arranged in the vertical direction with an interval of.

The outer peripheral surface of the hinge shaft 147 has a substantially cylindrical surface shape, has a diameter sufficiently larger than the plate thickness of other parts of the back cover 22, and projects downward to the lower side of the support base portion 165. The hinge shaft 147 is provided with a tapered insertion head 166 on the lower end side, and a recess 167 having a substantially U-shaped cross section between the insertion head 166 and the support base 165. There is. The recess 167 is recessed in the radial direction from the front surface side of the hinge shaft 147, and is formed long in the vertical axial direction between the insertion head 166 and the support base 165.

Therefore, the hinge shaft 147 has an elliptical shape in which the major axis portion 147A and the minor axis portion 147B are arranged in substantially right-angled directions, and the open end of the recess 167 is located on one end side of the minor axis portion 147B. .. The hinge shaft 147 has a recess 167 open to the front side.

The support base portion 165 is integrally provided on the front end side of the bent portion 145a, and the base wall 165a projecting outward from the bent portion 145a and a pair of upper and lower semicircular support walls projecting outward from the base wall 165a. It has a 165b and a connecting wall 165c that is arranged substantially at right angles to the base wall 165a and connects the upper and lower support walls 165b in the vertical direction.

The hinge bearing 148 has a support base portion 169 that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall portion 18a, and a holding portion 170 that is integrally formed on the back side of the support base portion 169 and holds the hinge shaft 147. The holding portion 170 rotatably holds the hinge shaft 147 around the axis, and supports the support base portion 165 on the hinge shaft 147 side from below. The support base portion 165 is provided with a molding opening 168 corresponding to the vertical width and the horizontal inner width of the holding portion 170.

Of the three upper and lower third hinge means 21, the hinge bearings 148 of the upper two third hinge means 21 have a holding portion 170 having a substantially U-shape in a plan view, as shown in FIGS. 30 to 31. It is formed. The holding portion 170 can rotatably hold the hinge shaft 147 around the axis and can be freely inserted and removed in the axial direction.

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the hinge bearing 148 of the one lower third hinge means 21 has a pair of holders in which the holding portion 170 projects rearward from the support base portion 169 and is elastically deformable in the inward and outward directions. It is composed of a member 171 and has a notch 172 for insertion / removal for a hinge shaft 147 formed on the rear end side of the holding member 171. The pair of holding members 171 can rotatably hold the hinge shaft 147 around the axis and can be freely inserted and removed in the axial direction, and from the notch for insertion and removal 172 due to elastic deformation of the holding member 171. It is also possible to insert and remove the hinge shaft 147 in the front-rear direction.

When the back cover 22 is attached to the back protection portion 14 via the third hinge means 21, the axis of the hinge shaft 147 of each third hinge means 21 is aligned with the holding portion 170 of the hinge bearing 148, and then the back cover 22 is attached to the back protection portion 14. The cover 22 may be pushed down and each hinge shaft 147 may be inserted into the holding portion 170 from the insertion head 166 side.

If the size of the back cover 22 becomes long in the vertical direction, it may be difficult to align the axes of all the hinge shafts 147 of the three third hinge means 21 with the holding portion 170 of the hinge bearing 148 at the same time. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 29, for example, the hinge shafts 147 of the two upper third hinge means 21 are inserted so as to be aligned with the holding portions 170 of the two hinge bearings 148, and the lower one is inserted. The hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 of the above is brought into contact with the rear side of the insertion / removal notch 172 of the hinge bearing 148.

Then, after inserting the hinge shafts 147 of the two upper third hinge means 21 into the two hinge bearings 148, the hinge shafts in contact with the rear side of the insertion / removal cutout portion 172 of the hinge bearing 148. The 147 may be pressed from the back side in the direction indicated by 147a and inserted into the holding portion 170 of the hinge bearing 148 of the lower third hinge means 21 due to the elastic deformation of the pair of holding members 171.

In this case, it is not necessary to align all the hinge shafts 147 of the three third hinge means 21 with the three hinge bearings 148 at the same time, and the hinge shafts 147 can be mounted on the inner frame 3 side via the third hinge means 21. It is also possible, and it is not necessary to increase the rigidity of the back cover 22 side to the extent that all three hinge shafts 147 coincide with the three hinge bearings 148 at the same time.

The hinge shaft 147 is integrally molded on the back cover 22 side, but there is a recess 167 that is recessed in the radial direction from the front side thereof, and the hinge shaft 147 itself has a substantially U-shaped cross section, so that the hinge shaft 147 is formed. The wall thickness can be made thin. Therefore, even if the diameter of the hinge shaft 147 is sufficiently secured, the wall thickness can be suppressed to about the plate thickness of the back cover 22, and the curing rate of the molten resin on the hinge shaft 147 side at the time of injection molding is slow. Therefore, it is possible to prevent molding distortion from occurring.

Further, when the back cover 22 is molded, the back cover 22 remains on the movable mold side and is pushed out from the front side by the extruded portion on the movable mold side, but the recess 167 is recessed from the front side to the rear side. Therefore, the hinge shaft 147 can be molded in the same manner as the normal injection molding of the back cover 22.

As shown in FIG. 3, since the payout means 23, the ball supply passage 51, and the ball guide passage 54 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the back side of the mounting portion 20a, the bent portion on the right side of the back cover 22 is viewed from the rear. The 145b is arranged inside the payout means 23 in the left-right direction so as not to interfere with the payout means 23 and the like.

Therefore, the dimension L1 from the rear-view right edge of the gaming machines 2 and 3 to the back-view right edge of the back cover 22 is from the back-view left edge of the game machines 2 and 3 to the back-view left edge (or hinge) of the back cover 22. It is larger than the dimension L2 up to (means). As a result, the vertical center line CL1 passing through the horizontal center of the back cover 22 is the third hinge on the left side of the rear view from the vertical center line CL2 passing through the horizontal center of the game machines 2 and 3. It is deviated to the means 21 side. Incidentally, the amount of deviation is about L1-L2 / 2.

The board mounting base 34 is mounted on the back side of the lower mounting portion 15 so as to close between the lower ends of the left and right side wall portions 18a and 18b of the back protection portion 14, and the board mounting base 34 is mounted on the back side of the ball collecting case 128. A discharge passage 131 for discharging the game ball from the discharge port 128b to the outside is provided.

The main board 137 controls the game operation on the game board 16 side, is formed in a horizontally long shape long in the left-right direction, and is housed in the main board case 138. The effect board 133 controls the effect of the entire gaming machine 1 based on the signal from the main board 137, and is housed in the effect board case 134. The liquid crystal board 135 controls the liquid crystal display means 28 based on the signal from the effect board 133, and is housed in the liquid crystal board case 136. The payout board 142 controls the payout means 23 based on the payout signal of the game ball from the main board 137, and is housed in the payout board case 143. The power supply board 140 supplies power to each part and is housed in the power supply board case 141.

The effect board 133 and the liquid crystal board 135 form a sub-board with respect to the main board 137, and the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 form a sub-board case (first board case) with respect to the main board case 138 (first board case). 2 board case).

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 35, the main board 137 has a horizontally long shape that is long in the left-right direction, and on the back surface of the main board 137, an integrated circuit device 174, an operating means 176 for a probability setting change mode, and input / output are used. Various electronic components such as a plurality of connectors 177 are mounted on each, and a board management information display unit 178 for displaying board management information such as a board management number is provided near the lower side. In addition to directly indicating the board management number, the board management information display unit 178 may also include necessary information such as a two-dimensional code, a model name, and a board name.

A plurality of integrated circuit devices 174 are distributed and arranged on the main board 137, and component information such as a two-dimensional code for identification and element names are printed on at least a part of the integrated circuit devices 174. A component information display unit 179 is provided.

The connectors 177 are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper part of the main board 137. The operating means 176 is arranged at a relatively easy-to-operate position such as a corner of the main board 137. This operating means 176 is for changing the jackpot probability setting in which the special symbol after the change becomes the jackpot mode, and can be turned on / off from the back side of the main board case 138 by inserting a dedicated operation key from the back cover 22 side. Is.

On the main board 137 side, apart from the operating means 176, a probability setting means (not shown) capable of setting a jackpot probability in which the special symbol after the change becomes a jackpot mode is provided. Then, when changing the probability setting, the operation key is inserted from the back side of the back cover 22, the operation means 176 of the main board case 138 is turned on, the power is turned on, and then the required means such as the game information clearing means is operated. By doing so, the set value of the jackpot probability of the probability setting means can be changed step by step, and the set value is fixed when the operation means is turned off by pulling out the operation key.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 35, the main board case 138 has a flat shape that closes the opening side of the first case body 180 on the back side formed in a front opening shape and the opening side of the first case body 180 on the front side of the main board 137. The second case body 181 of the above is provided so as to be openable and closable, and a sealing means 182 capable of sealing is provided on one end side in the left-right direction so that an opening mark remains at the time of opening. The first case body 180 and the second case body 181 are resin molded products in which electronic parts such as the internal integrated circuit device 174 are injection-molded with a transparent resin material so as to be transparent.

Since the main substrate case 138 can be opened / sealed up to 3 times, four sealing means 182 are provided in the vertical direction according to the number of times the main substrate case 138 is opened / sealed. Of these four sealing means 182, one sealing means 182 is used when sealing the first main board case 138, and the other three sealing means 182 are used for sealing the main board case 138 after opening. Use to seal each time you close.

The operating means 176 side and the connector 177 side of the first case body 180 are in contact with or close to the back side of the main board 137, and the operating means 176 side and the connector 177 side project rearward to the operating holes and connector holes. Is provided. The first case body 180 is provided with a rear wall portion 180a projecting rearward so as to face the main substrate 137, and a large number of heat in the main substrate case 138 is dissipated to the outside on the rear wall portion 180a. The heat dissipation hole 183 and the first opening history notation means 184 for entering the opening history at the time of opening the main board case 138 are provided.

The heat radiating holes 183 are for radiating heat generated from the electronic components in the main board case 138 to the outside, and a large number of heat radiating holes 183 are arranged vertically and horizontally in the forming region 185 at the substantially center of the rear wall portion 180a of the first case body 180. ing. The formation region 185 of the heat dissipation hole 183 is intermediate between the main board management information display unit 178 on the main board 137 side, the component information display unit 179 of the integrated circuit device 174, and the first opening history notation means 184 of the first case body 180. It does not hinder the visibility of a specific part including the board management information display unit 178 and the component information display unit 179 on the main board 137 side, such as by providing it in a portion, and hinders the heat dissipation of the heat dissipation hole 183 by the first opening history notation means 184. It is provided in a position where it does not.

The first opening history notation means 184 is for inputting the history at the time of opening the main board case 138, and with respect to the formation region 185 of the heat radiating hole 183 so as not to hinder the heat radiating property of the heat radiating hole 183. It is attached to the back surface side of the non-perforated region 187 away from the sealing means 182.

The first opening history notation means 184 is composed of an opening history notation sticker 188 in which an adhesive is applied to a transparent sheet capable of seeing through the inside of the main substrate case 138, and the first case body 180 is formed through the adhesive. It is affixed to the back side. On the back side of the back cover 22, an opening-shaped viewing window 53 is provided in front of and behind the first opening history notation means 184 so that the first opening history notation means 184 can be directly seen from the back side without opening the back cover 22. They are provided facing each other.

The first opening history notation means 184 includes a management information notation unit 190 for notating management information such as a management number of the main board 137, and a plurality of opening history notation units 191 for notating the regular opening history of the main board case 138. Are provided at predetermined intervals. In this embodiment, there are four sealing means 182, and since it is possible to open / seal up to three times except for one sealing means 182 that is initially in the sealed state, the opening / sealing is performed three times. Three opening history notation units 191 are provided so that the stop history can be written.

The management information notation unit 190 describes a control number of the main board 137 and a two-dimensional code indicating the control number. In addition, each opening history notation unit 191 has an opener notation unit 191a capable of indicating the name of the opener and an opening time notation unit 191b capable of indicating the opening time such as the date of opening at a predetermined interval. It is provided in a line in the left-right direction, and three opening history notation units 191 are provided below the management information notation unit 190 at predetermined intervals.

The gap between the management information notation unit 190 and the opening history notation unit 191, the gap between the opening history notation 191 and the opening history notation 191 and the gap between the opener notation 191a and the opening time notation 191b of the opening history notation 191 are The main substrate 137 side may be transparently visible through the transparent opening history notation sticker 188. Among the electronic components including the control element such as the integrated circuit device 174, the portion (specific portion) having a high demand for visibility may be arranged on the main substrate 137 so as to correspond to the gap portion.

The management information notation unit 190 and the opening history notation unit 191 are composed of an opaque portion formed by printing opaque ink, paint, etc. on the opening history notation sticker 188 and coating the other. The management information notation unit 190 and the opening history notation unit 191 may be provided directly on the first case body 180 without using the opening history notation sticker 188.

The first case body 180 is provided with a resin pouring portion trace 192 on the back surface side thereof and an extruded portion trace (not shown) on the front surface side. The resin pouring portion trace 192 is described in a shaded manner so that it can be easily identified in FIG. 35, but the same applies to other resin pouring portion traces.

The resin pouring portion trace 192 is a trace of the resin pouring portion in which the molten resin is poured into the cavity of the molding mold at the time of molding the first case body 180, and the extruded portion trace extrudes the first case body 180 after molding from the mold. It is a contact mark of the extruded part. The trace of the resin pouring portion 192 and the trace of the extruded portion constitute the trace of the resin molding portion used at the time of molding the first case body 180.

The same applies to the effect substrate case 134, the liquid crystal substrate case 136, the power supply substrate case 141, the payout substrate case 143, the back cover 22, and the like.

The first case body 180 of the main board case 138 has a heat dissipation hole 183, a resin pouring part mark 192, a resin molding part mark including an extruded part, and weld lines 192a and 192b, which display board management information on the main board 137 side. It does not overlap with any of the specific parts such as the part 178 and the component information display part 179 on the integrated circuit device 174. This is to ensure visibility for a specific portion on the main board 137 side in the main board case 138.

Two resin pouring traces 192 of the first case body 180 are provided at positions separated from the specific portion on the main substrate 137 side so that weld lines 192a and 192b do not occur corresponding to the specific portion on the main substrate 137 side. Has been done. That is, when the first case body 180 is molded, the rear wall portion 180a of the first case body 180 is formed in a non-perforated region 193 located near both ends of one diagonal line 180L passing through the heat radiation hole 183 forming region 185. There are two resin pouring traces 192 provided.

The resin pouring portion traces 192 are located on both sides of the diagonal line 180L so as to sandwich the formation region 185 of the heat radiation hole 183 at a predetermined interval, and the first case body 180 is formed on the resin pouring portion trace 192. It is molded by pouring molten resin into the cavity of the molding die from the two corresponding resin pouring portions.

When the molten resin is poured from the two resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 192 to mold the first case body 180, approximately half of the heat is dissipated to the rear wall portion 180a on the side close to each resin pouring portion trace 192. A weld line 192a is formed on the downstream side of the hole 183 by merging the molten resin poured from the resin pouring portion, and is formed by merging the molten resin from the two resin pouring portions in the substantially central portion between the two resin pouring portions. The weld line 192b can be made to connect between the plurality of heat dissipation holes 183.

The former weld line 192a can be shortened to the downstream side of each heat dissipation hole 183, while the latter weld line 192b can be lengthened so as to connect a plurality of heat dissipation holes 183 in the direction intersecting the diagonal line 180L corresponding to the resin pouring portion. Alternatively, it can be lengthened at a position separated from between the two resin pouring portions in the direction intersecting the diagonal line 180L.

Such weld lines 192a and 192b cause an extremely decrease in the tensile strength of the rear wall portion 180a of the first case body 180, and also cause the main substrate 137 in the main substrate case 138 via the rear wall portion 180a. When seeing through specific parts with high visibility requirements such as the component information display unit 179 attached to the integrated circuit device 174 on the side and the board management information display unit 178 displayed on the main board 137, it is a factor that hinders the visibility. Become. Therefore, not only each integrated circuit device 174 but also specific parts such as the component information display unit 179 and the board management information display unit 178 of the integrated circuit device 174 are arranged at positions away from the generation regions of the weld lines 192a and 192b. There is.

That is, looking at the relationship between the formation regions 185 of the heat dissipation holes 183 and the generation regions of the weld lines 192a and 192b of the main board case 138 and the integrated circuit devices 174 and the board management information display unit 178 on the main board 137. Each integrated circuit device 174 and the board management information display unit 178 are arranged at positions away from the formation area 185 of the heat dissipation hole 183 as well as the generation area of the weld lines 192a and 192b, and moreover, the main board case. It is also arranged at a position away from each resin pouring portion trace 192 of 138. Therefore, in the main board case 138, it is possible to sufficiently secure visibility for specific parts such as the integrated circuit device 174, the component information display unit 179, and the board management information display unit 178.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 36, the effect board 133 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction, and on the back surface of the effect board 133, there are a plurality of integrated circuit devices 195, volume adjusting means 196, connectors 197, 198, and other electronic components. The parts are appropriately distributed and mounted. Of the plurality of integrated circuit devices 195, at least a part of the integrated circuit devices 195 is provided with a component information display unit 199. Further, the effect board 133 is provided with a board management information display unit 200.

The component information display unit 199 is for displaying the component information of the integrated circuit device 195, and either directly displays the component information by printing or affixes a sticker on which the component information is printed. The board management information display unit 200 is adapted to directly display the board management information such as the board management number of the effect board 133 by printing, or to affix a sticker on which the board management information is printed. In addition to the board management number of the effect board 133, necessary information such as a two-dimensional code, a model name, and a board name may be written on the board management information display unit 200.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 36, the effect substrate case 134 can open and close the back side first case body 201 formed in a front opening shape and the front side second case body 202 formed in a flat shape. The effect board 133 is arranged on the back side of the second case body 202, and the electronic components and the like of the effect board 133 are covered from the back side by the first case body 201. For the first case body 201 and the second case body 202, molded products made of transparent resin are used so that the integrated circuit device 195 on the effect board 133 side, the component information display unit 199, the board management information display unit 200, etc. can be seen through from the outside. ing.

The connectors 197 and 198 sides of the first case body 201 are in contact with or close to the back side of the effect board 133, and a connector hole is provided in that portion so that the connectors 197 and 198 project rearward. The first case body 201 is provided with a rear wall portion 201a projecting rearward so as to face the effect substrate 133, and the rear wall portion 201a is provided with an operation hole 203 for the volume adjusting means 196 and the effect substrate. A large number of heat dissipation holes 204 are provided to dissipate the heat inside the case 134 to the outside.

The volume adjusting means 196 has a rotary operation type operation shaft 196a, and the operation hole 203 is formed at the bottom of the recessed portion 205 which is integrally recessed from the rear wall portion 201a toward the effect board 133 side, and the back cover 22 is formed. In the open state, the volume can be adjusted by inserting a tool such as a screwdriver from the operation hole 203 and rotating the operation shaft 196a.

The heat radiating holes 204 are for radiating heat generated from the electronic components in the effect board case 134 to the outside, and a large number of heat radiating holes 204 are arranged vertically and horizontally in the forming region 206 of the rear wall portion 201a of the first case body 201. The heat radiation hole 204 formation region 206 is provided over a wide area so as to ensure heat dissipation without impairing the visibility of specific parts such as the component information display unit 199 and the board management information display unit 200 on the effect board 133 side. A large number of heat dissipation holes 204 are arranged vertically and horizontally in the formation region 206.

On the rear wall portion 201a of the first case body 201, the effect board 133 side so that weld lines 208a and 208b do not occur at specific parts such as the component information display unit 199 and the board management information display unit 200 on the effect board 133 side. There are a plurality of, for example, three resin pouring portion traces 207 at a position deviating from the specific portion of the above and surrounding the formation region 206 of the heat radiation hole 204.

Therefore, at the time of molding the first case body 201, the molten resin is poured into the cavity of the molding die from the three resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion trace 207, and the first case body 201 is molded by injection molding.

When molten resin is poured from such three resin pouring portions and molded, a short weld line 208a is formed downstream of the heat radiating holes 204 on the heat radiating hole 204 side located near each resin pouring portion. On the other hand, even between the three resin pouring portions, a relatively long weld line is connected to the intermediate portion between the adjacent resin pouring portions so as to connect a plurality of heat dissipation holes 204 in the direction connecting the two resin pouring portions and the direction intersecting with each other. 208b can be made. This is the same as in the case of the main board case 138.

Even if weld lines 208a and 208b are generated on the rear wall portion 201a of the first case body 201 in this way, the weld lines 208a and 208b are located at positions deviated from the specific portion on the effect board 133 side, so that weld line The 208a and 208b do not reduce the visibility of the specific portion on the effect board 133 side.

In this embodiment, the integrated circuit device 195 is located in the formation region 206 of the heat radiating hole 204, but the heat radiating hole 204 may be provided so as not to overlap with the integrated circuit device 195. Further, although a part of the resin pouring portion trace 207 overlaps with a part of the integrated circuit device 195, the resin pouring portion trace 207 may not overlap with the integrated circuit device 195.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 37, the liquid crystal board 135 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction like the effect board 133, and on the back surface of the liquid crystal board 135 are electronic components such as a plurality of integrated circuit devices 210 and connectors 211. Are mounted in an appropriately dispersed manner. Of the plurality of integrated circuit devices 210, at least a part of the integrated circuit devices 210 is provided with a component information display unit 212. Further, the liquid crystal substrate 135 is provided with a substrate management information display unit 213.

The component information display unit 212 is for displaying the component information of the integrated circuit device 210, and either directly displays the component information by printing or affixes a sticker on which the component information is printed. The board management information display unit 213 displays board management information such as the board management number of the liquid crystal board 135 by printing. The board management information may be displayed other than by printing. Further, in the board management information display unit 213, necessary information such as a two-dimensional code, a model name, and a board name may be written together in addition to the board management number of the liquid crystal board 135.

Similar to the effect substrate case 134, the liquid crystal substrate case 136 includes a first case body 218 on the back side formed in an opening shape on the front side and a second case body 219 on the front side formed in a flat shape, and is a second case. The liquid crystal substrate 135 is fixed to the back side of the body 219, and the electronic components and the like of the liquid crystal substrate 135 are covered from the back side by the first case body 218. The first case body 218 and the second case body 219 are made of a transparent resin material so that specific parts such as the component information display unit 212 and the substrate management information display unit 213 of the integrated circuit device 210 on the liquid crystal substrate 135 side can be seen through from the outside. Injection-molded molded products are used.

The connector 211 side of the first case body 218 is in contact with or close to the back side of the liquid crystal substrate 135, and a connector hole is provided in that portion so that the connector 211 projects rearward. The first case body 218 is provided with a rear wall portion 218a projecting rearward so as to face the liquid crystal substrate 135, and a large number of the rear wall portions 218a dissipate heat from the inside of the liquid crystal substrate case 136 to the outside. The heat dissipation hole 214 is provided.

The heat radiating holes 214 are for radiating heat generated from the electronic components in the liquid crystal substrate case 136 to the outside, and are arranged in large numbers vertically and horizontally in the forming region 215 of the rear wall portion 218a of the first case body 218. The heat dissipation hole 214 formation region 215 is widespread so that heat dissipation can be ensured without impairing the visibility of specific parts such as the component information display unit 212 and the substrate management information display unit 213 of the integrated circuit device 210 on the liquid crystal substrate 135 side. A large number of heat dissipation holes 214 are arranged vertically and horizontally in the formation region 215.

On the rear wall portion 218a of the first case body 218, weld lines 216a and 216b are not generated at specific portions such as the component information display unit 212 and the substrate management information display unit 213 on the liquid crystal substrate 135 side from the specific portions. There are a plurality of, for example, three resin pouring portion traces 217 at positions that are separated and that surround the formation region 215 of the heat radiation hole 214.

Therefore, when the first case body 218 is molded, it is molded by injection molding in which the molten resin is poured into the cavity of the molding die from the three resin pouring portions corresponding to the traces of each resin pouring portion 217.

When molten resin is poured from the three resin pouring portions and molded, a short weld line 216a is formed downstream of the heat radiating holes 214 on the heat radiating hole 214 side located near each resin pouring portion. On the other hand, even between the three resin pouring portions, a relatively long weld line is connected to the intermediate portion between the adjacent resin pouring portions so as to connect a plurality of heat dissipation holes 214 in the direction connecting the two resin pouring portions and in the direction intersecting with each other. 216b can be made. This is the same as in the case of the main board case 138.

Even if weld lines 216a and 216b are generated on the rear wall portion 218a of the first case body 218 in this way, the weld lines 216a and 216b are located at positions deviated from the specific portion on the liquid crystal substrate 135 side. The 216a and 216b do not reduce the visibility of the specific portion on the liquid crystal substrate 135 side.

In this embodiment, there is a part of the integrated circuit devices 210 in the formation region 215 of the heat radiating holes 214, but the heat radiating holes 214 may be provided so as not to overlap with each integrated circuit device 210. Further, although the resin pouring portion trace 217 overlaps with the integrated circuit device 210, it is desirable that the resin pouring portion trace 217 does not overlap with the integrated circuit device 210.

When comparing the importance of the main board 137 housed in the main board case 138 and the sub-boards such as the effect board 133 housed in the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board 135 housed in the liquid crystal board case 136 in the gaming machine 1. The importance of the main board 137 (first board), which determines the game content of the gaming machine 1 itself, is compared with the sub-boards (second board) such as the effect board 133 and the liquid crystal board 135, which simply control the effect operation. It's much bigger. Therefore, the main board case 138 (first board case) for accommodating the main board 137 is required to have higher strength than the effect board case 134 (second board case) for accommodating the effect board 133, and at the same time, it is inside. High visibility is required for a specific part of the.

On the other hand, when the main substrate case 138, the effect substrate case 134, and the like are molded with resin, if the number of resin pouring portions is increased, there is an advantage that the cycle time required for molding the respective substrate cases 138 and 134 can be shortened and the production can be performed efficiently. On the other hand, there is a problem that the number of the resin pouring portion traces 192 and 207 increases and the visibility inside is lowered. Further, if the number of the resin pouring portion traces 192, 207 increases, the number of weld lines 192a, 192b, 208a, 208b formed between the resin pouring portions also increases, so that the weld lines 192a, 192b, 208a, 208b increase. As a result, the visibility inside the substrate cases 138 and 134 is lowered, and at the same time, the strength of the substrate cases 138 and 134 itself is also lowered.

Therefore, regardless of whether the volume of the synthetic resin portion of the main board case 138 and the sub-board case such as the effect board case 134 is substantially the same, or whether the volume of the main board case 138 is larger or smaller than that of the sub-board case. Do the following: For example, the number of resin pouring portion traces (or resin pouring portion) 192 of the first case body 180 of the main board case 138 is N2 (N2 ≧ 1), and the number of sub-boards such as the first case body 201 of the effect board case 134 is set. The number of resin pouring portion traces (or resin pouring portion) 207 on the case side is N2 + n2 (n2 ≧ 0). As a result, the strength and visibility of the main board case 138 side can be improved as compared with the effect board case 134 side.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the number N2 of the resin pouring portion trace 192 of the first case body 180 of the main board case 138 is set to two, and the number N2 + n2 of the resin pouring portion trace 207 of the first case body 201 of the effect board case 134. It is one less than the three.

Both the main board case 138 and the second case body 181, 202 side of the effect board case 134 are flat, and in order to correspond to the back surface side of the boards 133 and 137 itself, the resin pouring portion trace (or the resin pouring portion) ) May be the same number, but may be the same as the resin pouring portion trace (or resin pouring portion) on the first case body 180, 201 side.

The power supply board 140 has a horizontally long rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction, and electronic components such as an electric field capacitor 230 and a connector are mounted on the back side of the power supply board 140 as shown in FIG. The power supply board 140 supplies electric power to the main board 137, the effect board 133, the liquid crystal board 135, the payout board 142, and other parts via the connector and the harness.

The power supply board case 141 has a horizontally long shape that is long in the left-right direction so as to accommodate the power supply board 140, and is formed flatly with the first case body 231 on the back side formed in the front opening shape as shown in FIG. The second case body 232 on the front side is provided so as to be openable and closable, the power supply board 140 is housed on the opening side of the first case body 231 and the power supply board 140 can be pressed from the front side by the second case body 232. There is.

The first case body 231 is formed with a plurality of heat radiation holes 233 in the left-right direction on the back side of the rear wall portion 231a facing the power supply board 140 and the upper and lower corners thereof, and the first case body 231 has a plurality of heat radiation holes 233. Outside air is introduced from the lower heat radiation hole 233 to cool the electronic components of the power supply board 140, and the hot air is discharged to the outside from the upper heat radiation hole 233 of the first case body 231. There is.

When molding the first case body 231 and the second case body 232 of the power supply board case 141, they are also molded in the same manner as the first case body 180 of the main board case 138.

The payout board 142 has a horizontally long rectangular shape whose left-right length is slightly shorter than that of the power supply board 140 and whose vertical width is slightly longer than that of the power supply board 140. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 38, electronic components such as a plurality of integrated circuit devices 235, game information clearing means 236, payout error display means 237, and connector 238 are mounted on the back side of the payout board 142, and the board is also mounted. A board management information display unit 239 for displaying board management information such as a control number is provided.

Of the plurality of integrated circuit devices 235, at least a part of the integrated circuit devices 235 is provided with a component information display unit 240 on which management information such as a two-dimensional code and an element name is printed. The game information clearing means 236 is composed of a RAM clear switch having a push button type operation unit 236a, and is arranged at a position where the payout board 142 can be easily operated. The game information clearing means 236 is originally for clearing the game information stored in the RAM constituting the game information storage means (not shown) on the main board 137 side when the operation unit 236a is pressed. However, it is also used for the change when the set value of the jackpot probability is changed step by step.

The payout error display means 237 is for displaying the error occurrence status on the payout means 23 side, is composed of a 7-segment display element or the like, and is arranged at a position where the payout board 142 can be easily seen. The type of error that occurred in is displayed by emitting light based on identification information such as numbers from 1 to 5.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 38, the payout substrate case 143 can open and close the back side first case body 241 formed in a front opening shape and the front side second case body 242 formed in a flat shape. A payout board 142 is arranged on the back side of the second case body 242, and the electronic components and the like of the payout board 142 are covered from the back side by the first case body 241. The first case body 241 and the second case body 242 are made of transparent resin so that the component information display unit 240, the payout error display means 237, the board management information display unit 239, etc. of the integrated circuit device 235 on the payout board 142 side can be seen through from the outside. Molded products are used.

The connector 238 side and the game information clearing means 236 side of the first case body 241 are in contact with or close to the back side of the payout board 142, and the connector 238 and the game information clearing means 236 project rearward at that portion. A through hole is provided. The first case body 241 is provided with a rear wall portion 241a that swells rearward so as to face the payout board 142, and a large number of heat in the payout board case 143 is dissipated to the outside on the rear wall portion 241a. A heat radiating hole 243, an error information display means 245 for displaying the error information of the payout means 23, and an opening history notation means 246 for displaying the opening history of the payout board case 143 are provided.

Since the payout substrate case 143 can be opened and sealed up to twice, sealing means 247 that can be sealed so as to leave an opening mark at the time of opening is provided in the vertical direction on the left and right end sides of the payout substrate case 143. There are three in the. Of these three sealing means 247, one sealing means 247 is used when sealing the first payout substrate case 143, and the other two sealing means 247 are used for sealing the payout substrate case 143 after opening. Use to seal each time you close.

The heat radiating holes 243 are for radiating heat generated from the electronic components in the payout substrate case 143 to the outside, and a large number of heat radiating holes 243 are arranged vertically and horizontally in the forming region 244 of the rear wall portion 241a of the first case body 241. The formation region 244 of the heat dissipation hole 243 is provided over a wide area so as to ensure heat dissipation without impairing the visibility of specific parts such as the component information display unit 240 on the payout board 142 side and the board management information display unit 239. A large number of heat dissipation holes 243 are arranged vertically and horizontally in the formation region 244.

The opening history notation means 246 is composed of an opening history notation sticker 248 in which an adhesive is applied to a transparent sheet capable of seeing through the inside of the payout substrate case 143, and the non-perforated region 250 below the formation region 244 of the heat dissipation hole 243. It is affixed to. The opening history notation sticker 248 is provided with two upper and lower opening history notation units 249 for indicating the regular opening history of the payout substrate case 143.

The opening history notation unit 249 has an opener notation unit 249a capable of indicating the name of the opener and an opening time notation unit 249b capable of indicating the date of opening in a line in the left-right direction at a predetermined interval. Each time the payout board case 143 is sealed after opening, the name of the opener is indicated on the opener notation unit 249a, and the date of opening is indicated on the opening time notation unit 249b.

The opening history notation means 246 is composed of an opaque portion formed by printing opaque ink, paint, or the like, or by coating the opaque portion. The board management information display unit 239 and the opening history notation unit 249 may be provided directly on the first case body 241 without using the sticker.

The error information display means 245 is provided on the back surface side of the non-perforated region 250 away from the formation region 244 of the heat radiation hole 243, and the error information display means 245 is provided with "1. Disbursement stopped" and "2. Full error". "3. Out of ball error" "4. Payout error" "5. Ball jam error" and so on, error items 245a are displayed for each type of error.

The rear wall portion 241a of the first case body 241 has specific parts such as a component information display unit 240 on the payout board 142 side and a board management information display unit 239, and further, an error information display means 245 on the first case body 241 side. And, so that the opening history notation means 246 does not overlap with the weld lines 251a and 251b, respectively, at a specific part on the payout board 142 side, an error information display means 245 on the payout board case 143 side, and a position away from the opening history notation section 249. In addition, there are a plurality of, for example, three resin pouring portion traces 252 at positions surrounding the formation region 244 of the heat radiation hole 243. Therefore, when the first case body 241 is molded, it is molded by injection molding in which the molten resin is poured into the cavity of the molding die from the three resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion trace 252. The number of the resin pouring portion traces 252 is N2 + n2.

Even when the first case body 241 is molded by pouring molten resin from these three resin pouring portions, the heat radiating holes 243 located on the side closer to each resin pouring portion are similar to the case of the effect substrate case 134. On the side, a short weld line 251a is formed downstream of the heat dissipation hole 243. Also, between the three resin pouring portions, a relatively long weld line 251b can be formed in the intermediate portion between the adjacent resin pouring portions in the direction intersecting the direction connecting the two resin pouring portions, or both resin pouring portions can be provided. A relatively long weld line 251b is formed so as to connect a plurality of heat radiation holes 243 in the connecting direction and the intersecting direction.

Even if weld lines 251a and 251b are generated on the rear wall portion 241a of the first case body 241 in this way, the weld lines 251a and 251b are located at positions deviated from the specific portion on the payout substrate 142 side. The lines 251a and 251b do not reduce the visibility of the specific portion on the payout substrate 142 side.

Although some integrated circuit devices 235 correspond to the heat dissipation hole 243 forming region 244 and the error information display means 245, the integrated circuit device 235 may be provided so as not to overlap the heat dissipation holes 243 and the error information display means 245. good. Further, it is desirable that the resin pouring portion trace 252 does not overlap with the integrated circuit device 235 and the error information display means 245.

The main substrate 137, the effect substrate 133, the liquid crystal substrate 135, the payout substrate 142, and the like are connected as shown in FIG. 39. The connector 177a of the main board 137 is connected to the connector 197a of the effect board 133 via a plurality of or a large number of harnesses 255. Further, the connector 177b of the main board 137 is connected to the connector 238a of the payout board 142 via the harness 256. Further, the connector 177c of the main board 137 is connected to game parts such as the variable winning means 32 on the game board 16 side via a harness 257, a relay board (not shown), and the like.

The connector 197b of the effect board 133 is connected to the connector 211a of the liquid crystal board 135 via a plurality or a large number of harnesses 258, and the connector 198a of the effect board 133 is connected to the movable effect means 97 or the like via the harness 259. Has been done. The connector 211b of the liquid crystal substrate 135 is connected to the liquid crystal display means 28 via the harness 260. The connector 238a of the payout board 142 is connected to the payout means 23 via the harness 261.

On the back surface 144 side of the back cover 22, as shown in FIGS. 3, 4, 20, 21, and 40 to 42, a large number of heat dissipation holes 264 for dissipating heat in the back cover 22 are provided. The operation hole 265 corresponding to the operation means 176 for setting the probability, the operation hole 266 corresponding to the game information clearing means 236, the visual recognition window 267 corresponding to the opening history notation means 184, and the visual recognition corresponding to the error information display means 245. A window 268 and a viewing window 269 corresponding to the opening history notation means 246 are provided.

The operation holes 265 and 266 have tubular portions 265a and 266a protruding from the back surface portion 144 to the front side, and when operating the operation means 176 and the game information clearing means 236, the back cover 22 is kept closed. A fingertip or other object is inserted into the tubular portions 265a and 266a of the operation holes 265 and 266 from the back side of the cover 22, and operations such as pressing the operation means 176 and the game information clearing means 236 are performed.

The viewing windows 267 and 269 for the opening history notation means 184 and 246 are formed corresponding to the board cases 138 and 143 of the back portion 144 of the back cover 22, and the back cover 22 is kept closed. From the back side of 22, the notation information of the opening history notation units 191 and 249 of the opening history notation means 184 and 246 can be easily read. Therefore, it is not necessary to open and close the back cover 22 each time the notation information of the opening history notation means 184 and 246 is confirmed.

Since the back cover 22 is a molded product of transparent resin, it is possible to confirm the notation information of the management information notation units 178,239 and the part information display units 179,240 via the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22. Yes, it is not always necessary to provide an opening-shaped viewing window corresponding to the management information notation units 178,239 and the part information display units 179,240.

The back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 can confirm the error information displayed on the payout error display means 237 from the back side of the back cover 22 in the closed state. Further, the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 is provided with a viewing window 268 in an opening shape corresponding to the error information display means 245, and the display information of the error information display means 245 can be visually recognized from the viewing window 268. ..

When some error occurs in connection with the payout of the game ball by the payout means 23, the payout error display means 237 displays the error information. Therefore, by looking at the error information of the payout error display means 237 in the payout board case 143 from the back side of the back cover 22, the location where the error of the payout means 23 occurs can be easily confirmed.

If the location where the error has occurred cannot be determined only by displaying the error information of the payout error display means 237, the location where the error has occurred can be easily confirmed by collating with the display information of the error information display means 245 through the viewing window 268. can do.

The heat radiating holes 264 are centrally provided in the upper portion 22U of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22. The back portion 144 of the back cover 22 is substantially divided into an upper portion 22U corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, and a lower portion 22D corresponding to the main board case 138, the power supply board case 141, and the payout board case 143. It can be divided into two. Therefore, when the distribution of the heat radiating holes 264 is compared by dividing the upper portion 22U and the lower portion 22D, the heat radiating holes 264 are arranged substantially evenly over the entire upper portion 22U, and the lower side. It is not provided in the portion 22D. Each heat radiating hole 264 has an elongated shape long in the left-right direction, and is arranged at a predetermined interval between the heat radiating holes 264 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and the up-down direction.

The heat radiating hole 264 of the back cover 22 is not arranged in the vicinity of the operating shaft 196a of the volume adjusting means 196, and the volume adjusting means 196 is operated by inserting a tool such as a screwdriver from the heat radiating hole 264. The shaft 196a cannot be operated. Therefore, the operating means 176 and the game information clearing means 236 can be operated from the back side of the back cover 22 in a closed state without opening the back cover 22, but the volume adjusting means 196 cannot be operated unless the back cover 22 is opened. .. This is because the volume adjusting means 196 is operated less frequently than the operating means 176 and the game information clearing means 236.

In providing the heat radiating holes 264 on the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 in this way, by arranging the heat radiating holes 264 substantially evenly over the entire upper portion 22U of the heat radiating holes 264, the high temperature that tends to stay on the upper side inside the back cover 22 is high. Air can be discharged to the outside through the heat dissipation hole 264. Therefore, air convection occurs in the back cover 22, external cold air can be introduced from the outside air introduction portion 146 on the lower end side of the back cover 22, and high-temperature hot air can be discharged from the upper heat dissipation hole 264. It is possible to efficiently dissipate heat via 264.

Further, in the back portion 144 of the back cover 22, the lower portion 22D corresponding to the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143 is provided with operation holes 265 and 266 and viewing windows 267 to 269, and is on the lower side. Since the heat radiation hole 264 and other openings are not provided in substantially the entire area of the portion 22D, the state of the main board 137 and the payout board 142 inside the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143 from the back side of the back cover 22. Can be easily visually recognized, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the main substrate 137 and the payout substrate 142 with respect to a specific portion.

Moreover, since the lower portion 22D of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 is in a non-perforated state with no openings other than the operation holes 265 and 266 and the viewing windows 267 to 269, the lower portion 22D of the back surface portion 144 is opened. It is possible to promote the ascending flow of air on the lower side in the back cover 22 as compared with the case where there is. Therefore, the convection of air in the back cover 22 can be further promoted.

Since the heat radiating holes 264 have an elongated shape that is long in the left-right direction, it is possible to increase the opening area of each heat radiating hole 264 as compared with the case of the round hole shape, and the number of heat radiating holes 264 is reduced. can do.

Further, a harness 255 that curves in a U shape to the back side between the connectors 177a and 197a that are vertically close to each other, such as the connector 177a of the main board 137 and the connector 197a of the effect board 133, with a predetermined margin. When connecting vertically, the harness 255 in the vertical direction may come into contact with or press contact with the inside of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22.

Even in such a case, by forming the heat radiating hole 264 in the shape of a long hole in the left-right direction, the heat radiating hole 264 is in the left-right direction with respect to the harness 255 in the vertical direction, so that a part of the harness 255 is formed from the heat radiating hole 264. It does not come out on the back side of the back cover 22.

Further, the harness 258 for connecting the connector 197b of the effect board 133 and the connector 211a of the liquid crystal board 135 is arranged in the left-right direction, but the distance between the two connectors 197b and 211a in the left-right direction is the vertical distance between the connectors 177a and 197a. Since it is sufficiently large in comparison, the length of the harness 258 in the left-right direction becomes long, and it is not necessary to bend or bend it extremely as compared with the harness 255 between the connectors 177a and 197a. Unless it becomes extremely long, the harness 258 does not protrude from the heat radiation hole 264 to the back side of the back cover 22.

As shown in FIGS. 3, 41, and 42, a plurality of resin pouring portion traces 280 and extruded portion traces 281 are formed on the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 at positions deviating from specific portions of the respective substrates 133 and 137. be. The resin pouring portion trace 280 indicates a trace of the resin pouring portion in which the molten resin is poured into the cavity of the molding die at the time of molding the back cover 22, and is substantially covered in the entire cavity of the molding die within a predetermined time. The molten resin is dispersed and arranged so that the molten resin can be poured evenly.

In the upper portion 22U in which a large number of heat radiating holes 264 are arranged, a large number of heat radiating hole molded portions of the mold act as a flow inhibiting portion for the molten resin, so that the flow resistance when the molten resin flows in the cavity is large. Therefore, it is necessary to pour the molten resin from the resin pouring portion against the flow resistance. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is molded, the upper portion 22U has many resin pouring portions, and as a result, the upper portion 22U of the back cover 22 has many resin pouring portion traces 280. A plurality of the resin pouring portion traces 280, for example, N3, are provided from the intermediate portion to the peripheral portion of the formation region 282 of the heat radiation hole 264.

The upper portion 22U of the back cover 22 has a large number of heat dissipation holes 264, and an extrusion resistance is generated between the large number of heat dissipation hole molded portions of the mold and the heat dissipation holes 264, and an extrusion resistance is generated at the peripheral edge portion 145. There are far more extruded portion traces 281a and 281b than the number of resin poured portion traces 280.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the resin pouring portion trace 280 is arranged outside the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22. On the other hand, the extruded portion trace 281a has a circular shape and is arranged on the front side of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, and the extruded portion trace 281b has a semicircular shape and is arranged at the front end of the peripheral portion 145.

Further, in the lower portion 22D in which the operation holes 265 and 266 and the viewing windows 267 to 269 are close to a non-perforated state to some extent, the flow resistance when the molten resin flows in the cavity is smaller than that in the upper portion 22U. Since the molten resin circulates quickly in the cavity, the number of traces of the resin pouring portion 280 is smaller than that of the upper portion 22U.

Moreover, in the lower portion 22D, the main substrate case 138 and the payout substrate case are not impaired by the resin pouring portion trace 280 and the weld line 283 generated at the time of molding so as not to impair the visibility of specific parts of the main substrate 137 and the payout substrate 142. In the vicinity of the outer periphery of 143, there are a relatively small number of resin pouring traces 280.

That is, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 of the lower portion 22D of the back cover 22 is N3-n3 (N3> n3 ≧ 1), and 2 on the upper portion 22U side located near the upper side of the main substrate case 138. Even if the traces of the resin pouring portion 280 are included, the number is as small as four, one between the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143 and one at the outer position of the payout board case 143. ..

The resin molding part and weld line 283 such as the resin pouring part trace 280 of the lower portion 22D of the back cover 22, and the resin molding part and weld such as the resin pouring part trace 192 and 252 of the main substrate case 138 and the payout case 143. The lines 192a, 192b, 251a, and 251b are designed so that they do not overlap each other with respect to specific parts of the main substrate 137 and the payout substrate 142 even if they overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

The entire back cover 22 is divided into a hinge side portion 22L on the first hinge means 6 side and an anti-hinge side portion 22R on the opposite side to the first hinge means 6 with the center line CL1 as a boundary, and the traces of the resin pouring portions of both are divided. When comparing the number NX of 280, the number NR of the resin pouring portion 280 of the anti-hinge side portion 22R having a large volume is larger than the number NL of the resin pouring portion 280 of the hinge side portion 22L having a small volume.

This is because the bending length of the bending portion 145a to the front side of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22 is longer than the bending length of the bending portion 145b to the front side, and the anti-hinge side portion 22R of the back cover 22. This is because the volume is larger than the volume of the hinge side portion 22L. As a result, when the back cover 22 is molded, the molten resin can be poured substantially evenly in a short time into the cavity of the anti-hinge side portion 22R of the mold and the cavity of the hinge side portion 22L.

Incidentally, the number NL of the resin pouring portion trace 280 of the anti-hinge side portion 22R of the back cover 22 is 4, and the number NR of the resin pouring portion trace 280 of the hinge side portion 22L is 3. The number of traces of the resin pouring portion 280, NL = 4, and NR = 3, is merely an example.

Five resin-filled traces 280 of the anti-hinge side portion 22R are dispersed in the vicinity of the bent portion 145c and the central side of the back surface portion 144, and are arranged in the vertical direction. Further, the resin pouring portion trace 280 of the hinge side portion 22L is arranged vertically dispersed on the back surface portion 144 in the vicinity of the bending portions 145b, 145c, 145d. Therefore, it is possible to improve the circulation of the molten resin from the outer peripheral portion 145 side to the cavity on the back surface portion 144 side in the vicinity thereof.

The resin pouring portion trace 280 of the hinge side portion 22L is in the vicinity of the bent portions 145b, 145c, 145d, but there is only the resin pouring portion trace 280 on the left-right central side of the back portion 144, and the hinge side portion. There is no resin pouring portion trace 280 on the left and right center side of 22L. This is because the molten resin in the cavity in the central portion of the back surface portion 144 has good circulation.

Even when molten resin is poured into the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 from the resin pouring portion corresponding to the resin pouring portion trace 280, the integrated circuit devices 174,195,210 on the respective substrates 133, 135, 137, 142 sides. , 235, parts information display unit 179, 199, 212, 240, board management information display unit 178, 200, 213, 239, etc. There are traces of the resin pouring portion 192, 207, 217, 252 at a position deviated from the specific portion on the 137, 142 side.

At the time of injection molding of the back cover 22, molten resin is poured into the cavity of the molding die from the resin pouring portion corresponding to each resin pouring portion trace 280 and molded. In this case, on the opening side of the heat radiating hole 264 or the like, a short weld line (not shown) is formed on the downstream side of each heat radiating hole 264 on the side close to each resin pouring portion due to the merging of the molten resin poured from the resin pouring portion. Further, in the intermediate portion between the two adjacent resin pouring portions, a long weld line 283 due to the merging of the molten resin from the two resin pouring portions can be formed to connect the plurality of heat radiating holes 264.

The resin pouring portion trace 280 is positioned so as to sandwich the formation region 282 of the heat dissipation hole 264 at a predetermined interval, and when the back cover 22 is molded, two resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion trace 280 are formed. It is molded by pouring molten resin into the cavity of the molding die from the part.

When the back cover 22 is molded by pouring molten resin from two resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 280, the back portion 144 is on the downstream side of approximately half of the heat dissipation holes 264 on the side close to each resin pouring portion. A weld line (not shown) is formed by merging the molten resin poured from the resin pouring portion, and a weld line is formed by merging the molten resin from the two resin pouring portions in the substantially central portion between the two resin pouring portions. The 283 can be made to connect the plurality of heat dissipation holes 264.

The former weld line can be shortened to the downstream side of each heat dissipation hole 264, but the latter weld line 283 can be lengthened so as to connect a plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 in the direction intersecting the diagonal direction corresponding to the resin pouring portion. Or, it can be lengthened at a position separated from between the two resin pouring portions in a direction intersecting the diagonal direction.

Such a weld line 283 causes an extremely decrease in the tensile strength of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, and also causes the back side of the back cover 22 to pass through the back surface portion 144 of each substrate 133, 135, 137, This is a factor that hinders visibility when visually recognizing a specific portion on the 142 side. However, by considering the arrangement position of the resin pouring portion, it is possible to prevent the weld line 283 generated on the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 from overlapping the specific portion on each substrate 133, 135, 137, 142 side. Therefore, the visibility is not hindered by the weld line 283.

For example, looking at the positional relationship between each resin pouring portion trace 280 and each weld line 283 of the back cover 22, the upper portion 22U of the back portion 144 is as shown in FIG. 41, and the lower portion 22D of the back portion 144 is shown in FIG. It is as shown in 42.

That is, on the upper side portion 22U side of the back surface portion 144, as shown in FIG. 41, a weld line c is formed between the resin pouring portion trace a and the resin pouring portion trace b, and the resin pouring portion trace a and the resin pouring portion trace d are provided. There is a weld line e between the resin pouring portion b, a weld line f between the resin pouring portion trace b and the resin pouring portion trace d, and a weld line h between the resin pouring portion trace d and the resin pouring portion trace g. A weld line s is provided between the pouring portion a and the resin pouring portion g, a weld line j is provided between the resin pouring portion d and the resin pouring portion i, and the resin pouring portion b and the resin pouring portion trace i are provided. Weld lines k are generated between and each.

Each weld line 283 on the upper portion 22U side is generated at a position deviated from specific parts such as the component information display units 199 and 212 of the effect board 133 and the liquid crystal board 135 and the board management information display units 200 and 213. Therefore, the resin pouring traces 207 and 217 and the weld lines 208b and 216b on the rear wall portions 201a and 218a of the substrate cases 134 and 136 are the component information display portions 199 and 212 of the effect substrate 133 and the liquid crystal substrate 135, and the substrate management information display. Although there are a large number of heat dissipation holes 264 on the back surface portion 144 of the weld line 283 in combination with the fact that the portions 200, 213 and the like are separated from the specific portion, the visibility of the specific portion is hindered by the weld line 283 and the like. There is nothing.

In the lower portion 22D of the back surface portion 144, as shown in FIG. 42, a weld line m is formed between the resin pouring portion trace g and the resin pouring portion trace l, and the resin pouring portion trace d and the resin pouring portion trace l are formed. There is a weld line n between the resin pouring portion trace i and the resin pouring portion trace l, a weld line o between the resin pouring portion trace i and the resin pouring portion trace l, and a weld line q between the resin pouring portion trace i and the resin pouring portion trace p. Weld lines r are generated between the trace l and the trace p of the resin pouring portion, respectively.

Each weld line 283 of the lower portion 22D is generated at a position deviated from specific parts such as the component information display units 179 and 240 and the board management information display units 178 and 239 of the main board 137 and the payout board 142. Therefore, the traces of the resin pouring portion 280 and the weld line 283 on the rear wall portions 180a and 241a of the substrate cases 138 and 143 are the component information display portions 179 and 240 and the substrate management information display units 178 and 239 of the main substrate 137 and the payout substrate 142. The visibility of the specific part is not impaired by the weld line or the like in combination with the fact that the specific part is deviated from the specific part. Further, since the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 does not have heat dissipation holes or the like corresponding to the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143, there are a large number of heat dissipation holes 204 and 214 on the effect board 133 side and the liquid crystal board 135 side. Visibility is further improved in comparison.

At the time of injection molding of the back cover 22, molten resin is poured into a cavity between a protruding movable mold and a recessed fixed mold for molding. After the resin is cured, the movable mold is opened so as to be separated from the fixed mold, and the molded product for the back cover 22 remaining on the movable mold side is extruded by an extrusion portion such as an extrusion pin on the movable mold side.

The extruded portion traces 281a and 281b are traces of the extruded portion being brought into contact with the molded product at the time of die cutting, and the movable mold has the back portion 144 and the peripheral portion 145 in consideration of the extrusion resistance of each portion of the back cover 22. A large number of extruded portions are provided so as to correspond to the above, and a large number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b remain on the back surface portion 144 and the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22.

The extruded portion trace 281a of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 has a round shape, and the extruded portion trace 281b of the peripheral portion 145 has a semicircular shape, and the shape differs depending on the conditions of the target portion. On the upper side of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, a large number of extruded portion traces 281a are arranged between the heat radiation holes 264 so as to be substantially evenly distributed over the entire area of the heat radiation hole 264 forming region 282. Further, on the lower side of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, the peripheral portion of the main substrate case 138 and the peripheral portion of the payout substrate case 143 are arranged corresponding to the peripheral portion. On the payout board case 143 side, the extruded portion trace 281a is arranged at the peripheral portions such as the four corners of the viewing window 268 for the error display part of the payout board 142.

Therefore, the upper portion 22U of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 has a large number of heat radiating holes 264, which is structurally complicated and has a large extrusion resistance. Since there is an extruded portion trace 281a, the extruded portion corresponding to each extruded portion trace 281a can sufficiently resist the extruding resistance of the back cover 22.

On the other hand, the lower portion 22D of the back portion 144 of the back cover 22 has no heat dissipation hole 264 or the like and has a flat spread compared to the upper side and the extrusion resistance is small, so that the number of extrusion portion traces 281a and 281b is large. It is less than the upper side. Further, in the lower portion 22D of the back cover 22, it is important to ensure visibility of the main board 137 and the payout board 142. Therefore, the overlap of the extruded portion traces 281a and 281b with respect to the main board 137 and the payout board 142 is minimized. A small number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b are arranged around the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143. Therefore, the lower portion 22D of the back cover 22 can be easily extruded from the mold without impairing the visibility of the back cover 22 with respect to the main substrate 137 and the payout substrate 142.

The extruded portion traces 281b of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22 are arranged on the front end surface of the peripheral edge portion 145 at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction thereof. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is die-cut, the front end surface of the peripheral edge portion 145 is pressed in the pushing direction by the extruded portion, so that the peripheral edge portion 145 can be reliably removed from the movable mold.

In this type of gaming machine 1, molded products such as the main substrate case 138 and the payout substrate case 143 are manufactured by an injection molding method in which molten resin is poured into a cavity from a resin pouring portion of a mold. Therefore, if the number of resin pouring portions is increased, the molten resin can be quickly poured into the cavity, the cycle time at the time of molding the molded product can be shortened, and there is an advantage that efficient manufacturing can be performed.

However, if the number of resin pouring portions increases in the molded product after molding, traces of 192,252 resin pouring portions corresponding to the number of resin pouring portions are formed, and weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, 251b are generated. .. Then, the traces of the resin pouring portion 192,252 and the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, 251b are important specific portions such as the substrate management information display portions 178, 239 displayed on the substrates 137, 142 in the substrate cases 138, 143. In the case of corresponding to the above, the visibility to the specific part is lowered, and it is a big cause that the mechanical strength of the substrate cases 138 and 143 is lowered regardless of whether or not it corresponds to the specific part.

That is, in resin molding, injection molding is a molding method capable of mass-producing molded products having a complicated shape in one process, and the molding process follows processes of melting, transfer, cooling, and solidification. The traces of the resin pouring portion 192 and 252 are traces of the trace of the resin pouring portion in which the molten resin is poured into the cavity of the mold, and the traces of the resin pouring portion 192 and 252 reduce the visibility to a specific part inside due to diffused reflection of light. There is a problem to do.

The weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, and 251b are phenomena that occur when molten resin is poured into the cavity from the resin pouring portion and when a molded product having holes and openings is molded. When the resins merge again, the surface of the molten resin at the merged portion is slightly lowered and hardened, so that the resin is generated in a line shape. Then, in the case of the substrate cases 138 and 143, at the locations where the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a and 251b are generated, the visibility to a specific part inside is lowered due to diffused reflection of light, and the tensile impact strength is extremely lowered. It causes a decrease in mechanical strength such as light.

Therefore, various weld line countermeasures have been taken in the past, such as simulating the flow path of the molten resin in the cavity to predict the occurrence position of the weld line and reinforcing the occurrence location of the weld line. However, it is difficult to solve this weld line problem due to cost and other reasons, and it is one of the important issues common to molded products of home appliances and various other products.

Also in the game machine 1, the one is arranged in a place where the player touches the hand of the player on the front side of the game machines 2 and 3 (for example, the operation button 64 etc.), or the player on the back side of the game machines 2 and 3 Various molded products are used, such as those arranged in a place that cannot be touched (for example, main board case 138, effect board case 134, back cover 22, etc.).

The various board cases 138 and 143 have internal boards 137 and 142 as measures to prevent fraudulent activity against the respective boards 137 and 142 and to facilitate the detection of such fraudulent activity. Although it is configured so that the condition of a specific part of the above can be easily confirmed, the traces of the resin pouring portion 192,252 and the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, 251b cause a decrease in the visibility inside the substrate cases 138,143. Further, the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a and 251b have a problem of causing a decrease in the mechanical strength of the substrate cases 138 and 143.

Even if the board is used for the same game machine 1, the main board 137 has a very large influence on the result of the whole game, and therefore, the integrated circuit device 174 is likely to be targeted as a fraudulent target such as a fraudulent replacement. The main board case 138 that houses the main board 137 is required to have much higher visibility and mechanical strength than the sub-board case that houses other sub-boards.

Even if the position where the weld line is generated can be specified to some extent by simulating the flow path of the molten resin in the cavity, the substrate cases 138 and 143 and the separately molded products such as the back cover 22 overlap each other. When the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, 251b of one of the molded products are disengaged from a specific part of the substrate, the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, 251b of the other molded product are arranged. If it overlaps with the specific part, it cannot be said that the visibility of the specific part is secured as a result.

In the molded product, there are traces of the extruded portion in addition to the traces of the resin pouring portion 192 and 252 as the traces of resin molding at the time of molding, and the traces of the extruded portion also contribute to the deterioration of visibility. That is, from the viewpoint of ensuring visibility for a specific part, when the molded product is extruded from the movable mold by the extruded portion, the extruded portion traces 281a and 281b formed corresponding to the extruded portion are also the resin pouring portion traces 192. It is the same as 252 etc.

Therefore, when manufacturing various resin parts used in the gaming machine 1, the molding is performed while considering the optimum requirements for each resin part. For example, in comparison between the operation button 64, which is the first resin member (cover body) that the player can contact, and the back cover 22, which is the second resin component that the player cannot contact, when the operation button 64 is molded. The number of the resin pouring portion traces 90 is N1 (N1 ≧ 1), and the number of the resin pouring portion traces 280 at the time of molding the back cover 22 is N1 + n1 (n1 ≧ 1). Incidentally, the number of the resin pouring portion traces 90 of the operation button 64 is one, and the number of the resin pouring portion traces 280 of the back cover 22 is about 5 to 10, for example, 7.

In the case of the operation button 64, the generation of the weld line can be prevented and the resin pouring can be prevented by pouring the molten resin from one resin pouring portion corresponding to the one resin pouring portion trace 90 and molding the molten resin. Since the number of traces 90 is reduced, it takes time to pour the molten resin, the molding efficiency is lowered, and the manufacturing cost is increased, but there is an advantage that the aesthetic appearance and strength of the operation button 64 after molding are improved.

On the other hand, in the case of the back cover 22, the number of the resin pouring portion traces 280 is 7, which is larger than that of the operation button 64, and at the time of molding, the molten resin is formed from the 7 resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 280. Therefore, the molten resin can be easily poured into the cavity, the molding efficiency can be improved, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, there are many traces of the resin pouring portion 280, and the appearance and strength of the back cover 22 after molding are deteriorated due to the generation of the weld line 283, etc. Since it protects from the back side of the machine and does not come into contact with the player, there is no particular problem of a slight decrease in aesthetics and strength.

Therefore, consider where the resin member is arranged with respect to the game machine main bodies 2 and 3, such as the operation button 64 that the player can contact and the back cover 22 that the player cannot contact. It is necessary to determine the number of resin pouring parts and balance the aesthetics, strength and molding efficiency.

The operation button 64 includes a body portion 68 provided with a flow-inhibiting portion of the molten resin and an operation portion 70 continuously formed on the upper end side of the body portion 68, and the flow-inhibiting portion of the body portion 68. The resin pouring portion trace 90 is arranged on the back side. Two flow blocking portions are arranged on the left and right sides facing each other in the radial direction of the body portion 68, and are composed of a pair of notch portions 68a recessed from the edge of the body portion 68 toward the operation portion 70 side. There is.

The board cases used in the gaming machine 1 include, for example, a main board case (first board case) 138 for accommodating a main board 137 for game operation control, and an effect board for effect operation control different from the main board 137. There is an effect board case (second board case) 134 for accommodating 133. Taking the main substrate case 138 and the effect substrate case 134 as an example, the number of the resin pouring portion traces 192 and 207 will be considered.

The first case body 180 of the main board case 138 has a resin pouring portion trace 192 as shown in FIG. 35, and the first case body 201 of the effect board case 134 has a resin pouring portion as shown in FIG. There is a mark 207. Assuming that the number of resin pouring portion traces 192 of the main substrate case 138 is N2 (N2 ≧ 1) (for example, 2), the number of resin pouring portion traces 207 of the effect substrate case 134 is N2 + n2 (n2 ≧ 0). ) (For example, 3). Therefore, the number of resin pouring traces 192 and 207 between the main board case 138 and the effect board case 134 is the same, or the number of resin pouring portion traces 207 of the effect substrate case 134 is the same as the number of resin pouring traces 192 of the main substrate case 138. There are n2 (n2 ≧ 1) more than the number of.

When the main board case 138 and the effect board case 134 are molded by the injection molding method, the traces of the resin pouring portion 192,207 and the weld lines 192a, 192b, 208a, 208b reduce the visibility inside the board cases 134,138. In addition, the weld lines 192a, 192b, 208a, and 208b have a problem of causing a decrease in the mechanical strength of the substrate cases 134 and 138. However, even if the board is used for the same game machine 1, the main board 137 has a very large influence on the result of the whole game. Therefore, the integrated circuit device 174 is illegally replaced as compared with the effect board 133. The main board case 138 that houses the main board 137 is required to have much higher visibility and mechanical strength than the effect board case 134 that houses the effect board 133. It will be.

Therefore, the number of resin pouring portion traces 192 during molding of the main substrate case 138 is less than the number N2 + n2 (n2 ≧ 0) of the number of resin pouring portion traces 207 during molding of the effect substrate case 134 N2 (N2 ≧ 1). By using two, for example, two, it is possible to prevent a decrease in visibility and mechanical strength on the main board case 138 side. Further, by setting the number of the resin pouring portion traces 207 at the time of molding the effect substrate case 134 to N2 + n2 (n2 ≧ 0), the visibility and mechanical strength of the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136 side are slightly lowered. However, the molten resin can be easily poured into the cavity, the molding efficiency can be improved, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition to the resin pouring portion trace 192 of the main substrate case 138 and the resin pouring portion trace 207 of the effect substrate case 134, the resin pouring portion trace 192 of the main substrate case 138 and the resin pouring portion trace 217 of the liquid crystal substrate case 136. The relationship with is also feasible.

When looking at the relative positions of the back surfaces of the main board case 138, the effect board case 134, and the liquid crystal board case 136 in the front-rear direction, the back surfaces of the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 are substantially at the same position, and the main board case 138 The back surface of the surface protrudes rearward from the effect board case 134 and the like. That is, the back surface of the rear wall portion 180a of the main substrate case 138 projects to the back side of the back surface of the rear wall portion 201a of the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136.

Therefore, as long as the back surface 144 of the back cover 22 corresponding to each board case 134, 136, 138 is substantially flat, the distance between the back surface of the main board case 138 and the back surface 144 of the back cover 22 is the effect board case 134. , It is smaller than the distance between the back surface of the liquid crystal substrate case 136 and the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22.

In this way, even when the respective substrate cases 134, 136, and 138 are viewed through the back surface 144 of the back cover 22, the visibility of the inside of the main substrate case 138 can be improved by the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate. It is improved as compared with the visibility to the inside of the case 136. The amount of protrusion of the main board case 138, the effect board case 134, and the liquid crystal board case 136 to the rear may be substantially the same.

In the resin back cover 22 that protects the main board case 138, the effect board case 134, and the liquid crystal board case 136, as shown in FIG. 40, a region overlapping the main board case 138 in the lower portion 22D of the back cover 22 is defined. When one region is set and the region overlapping the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 in the upper portion 22U of the back cover 22 is set as the second region, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in the first region is N3 (N3 ≧). 1) It is desirable that the number is (for example, 2) and the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in the second region is N3 + n3 (n3 ≧ 1) (for example, 5). It is desirable that the first region and the second region of the back cover 22 have substantially the same area and volume.

By doing so, in the first region overlapping the lower portion from the main board case 138, the visibility is improved via the back cover 22, and the second region overlapping the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136. Even when a large number of heat radiation holes 264 are arranged in the space, the flow of the molten resin in the cavity does not become extremely poor due to the molded portion of the heat radiation holes 264, and the molding efficiency of the back cover 22 does not decrease.

When molding the back cover 22, a plurality of first extruded portions are arranged corresponding to the first extruded portion trace 281a of the back portion 144 of the back cover 22, and the second extruded portion of the peripheral portion 145 of the back cover 22. A movable mold in which a plurality of second extrusion portions are arranged corresponding to the trace 281b is used. When the back cover 22 after molding is extruded, the first extruded portion and the second extruded portion on the movable mold side are brought into contact with the back portion 144 and the peripheral portion 145 of the back cover 22, respectively, in a state of being in contact with each other. The resin part is extruded by moving the extruded portion in the extruding direction at the same time with the same stroke. Therefore, on the back cover 22 after molding, the first extruded portion trace 281a and the second extruded portion trace 281b remain at a plurality of locations corresponding to each extruded portion.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 40, the first extruded portion trace 281a of the back surface portion 144, which makes it easy to secure the contact area of the first extruded portion, has a large circular shape to secure the contact area of the second extruded portion. The second extruded portion trace 281b of the peripheral portion 145, which is easy to facilitate, has a semicircular shape with a small area, and the shape and size of the first extruded portion trace 281a and the second extruded portion trace 281b are different. The back cover 22 can be extruded by an extruded portion having a suitable shape and size.

When the surface area of the back cover 22 is divided into a heat dissipation area 264A in which a plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 are arranged and a non-heat dissipation area 264B other than the heat dissipation area 264A, the heat dissipation area 264A and the non-heat dissipation area 264B Since the degree of adhesion of the back cover 22 to the movable mold is significantly different, the number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b of the non-heat dissipation region 264B having a small degree of adhesion is increased according to the difference in the degree of adhesion of the back cover 22 to the movable mold. It is assumed that N5 (N5 ≧ 1) is used, and the number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b in the heat dissipation region 264A having a high degree of adhesion is N5 + n5 (n5 ≧ 1).

For example, in the heat radiation region 264A of the back cover 22, N5 + n5 (n5 ≧ 1) extruded portion traces 281a and 281b are arranged between the heat radiation holes 264 of the back surface portion 144 so as to be substantially evenly distributed. Although a large extrusion resistance is generated by the molded portion of the back cover 22, the heat dissipation region 264A side of the back cover 22 can be extruded against the extrusion resistance.

On the other hand, the number of extruded portions 281a and 281b in the non-heat dissipation region 264B is smaller than the number of N5 (N5 ≧ 1) and the number of extruded portions 281a and 281b on the heat dissipation region 264A side, but the number of extruded portions 281a and 281b in the non-heat dissipation region 264B is smaller. Since the back surface portion 144 has a certain degree of opening, most of which is flat and has a small extrusion resistance, the visibility to the main substrate case 138 is also improved.

The back cover 22 includes a back surface portion 144 that protects the back members of the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, and the like from the back side, and a peripheral edge portion 145 that bends from the outer circumference of the back surface portion 144 to the front side to protect the back member from the outside. It has. When molding such a back cover 22, the molten resin is poured into the cavity from the resin pouring portion and molded in the same manner as other back parts and the like.

The back cover 22 is attached to the left and right mounting portions 20a and 20b on the game machine main body 2 and 3 side, but the front and rear positions of the mounting portions 20a and 20b are different on the left and right due to the relative relationship with the back member and other peripheral members. For some reason, the back cover 22 itself often has a left-right asymmetric structure. Therefore, when arranging the resin pouring portion in the molding die for the back cover 22, the left and right volume ratios of the left and right bent portions 145a and 145b of the peripheral portion 145 are taken into consideration with respect to the entire cavity. The resin pouring portion is arranged so that the circulation of the molten resin becomes substantially uniform.

That is, when looking at the surface region of the back cover 22, as shown in FIG. 40, a first region having a large volume (with reference to a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, for example, the center line CL1 ( When divided into the anti-hinge side portion 22R) and the second region (hinge side portion 22L) having a smaller volume than the first region, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 at the time of molding in the second region is N6 (N6). ≧ 1), and the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 at the time of molding in the first region is N6 + n6 (n6 ≧ 1).

By allocating the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in consideration of the volume ratio between the first region and the second region in this way, the circulation of the molten resin with respect to the entire cavity becomes substantially uniform, so that the back cover 22 is molded. It is possible to improve the molding efficiency at the time of molding and prevent an extreme decrease in the partial strength of the back cover 22.

The resin pouring portion trace 280 may be arranged on both the back surface portion 144 and the bent portions 145a and 145b of the back cover 22, but it is desirable to arrange the resin pouring portion trace 280 on the back surface portion 144. In the case of the back cover 22 provided with the bent portions 145a and 145b on both the left and right sides of the back portion 144, the bent portion 145a in the first region generally has a larger protruding length than the bent portion 145b in the second region. However, the same applies when the volume is increased or decreased due to factors other than the length of the protrusion. The back cover 22 is attached to the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 so that one of the bent portions 145a and 145b can be opened and closed by the third hinge means 21, and the other of the bent portions 145a and 145b is attached by the latch means 24 with the back cover 22 closed. Stop at the game machine main body 2 and 3.

A substrate (first member) 137 on which electronic components 174 are mounted and having a specific portion such as a component information display unit 179, and a resin substrate case (first member) that protects the substrate 137 so that the specific portion on the substrate 137 side can be visually recognized. In the gaming machine 1 provided with the two members) 138 and provided with a through hole such as a heat radiation hole 183 in the region corresponding to the substrate 137 of the substrate case 138, from the viewpoint of ensuring the visibility of a specific portion of the substrate 137, the present invention is used. The specific portion needs to be arranged at a position that does not overlap with the through hole, the weld lines 192a and 192b, the resin pouring portion trace 192, and the extruded portion trace.

Further, in the substrate case 138 for accommodating the substrate 137 on which the electronic component 174 is mounted and the back cover (second member) 22 for protecting the substrate case 138, a plurality of heat dissipation holes (through holes) 183 are provided in the substrate case 138. The same applies when there is.

If the substrate case 138 and the back cover 22 have small through holes, weld lines 192a and 192b, resin pouring portion traces 192, extruded portion traces, and the like, light is diffusely reflected at those portions, so that visibility to a specific portion is reduced. Further, if there is a through hole such as a heat radiating hole 183, a weld line 192a is generated on the downstream side of the heat radiating hole 183 when the substrate case 138 and the back cover 22 are molded. Decreases. Therefore, in order to ensure the visibility of the specific portion on the substrate 137 side, the specific portion overlaps with the substrate case 138, the through hole of the back cover 22, the weld lines 192a and 192b, the resin pouring portion trace 192, and the extruded portion trace. It is desirable to place it in a position where it does not become.

When the back member including the board case 138 for accommodating the board 137 and the resin back cover 22 for visually protecting the back member side are provided, the back cover 22 is provided from the viewpoint of ensuring the visibility of a specific portion. It is necessary to arrange the trace of the resin molding part provided at the time of molding at a position that does not overlap with the specific part. For example, in the relationship between the first substrate case 138 accommodating the main substrate 137 for controlling the game operation and the back cover 22 overlapping the first substrate case 138, the resin molded portion trace of the back cover 22 is the first. It is desirable to arrange it at a position where it does not overlap with the board case 138. The traces of the resin molding portion at the time of molding include the trace of the resin pouring portion 192 and the trace of the extruded portion.

When a back member including a first board case 138 for accommodating the main board 137 and a resin back cover 22 for visually covering the back member are provided, and the board management information display unit 178 is provided on the main board 137. From the viewpoint of ensuring the visibility of the substrate management information display unit 178, it is necessary to arrange the trace of the resin molding portion of the back cover 22 at the time of molding at a position that does not overlap with the substrate management information display unit 178.

Even when the back cover 22 overlaps with the first substrate case 138, the trace of the resin molded portion of the back cover 22 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with the substrate management information display unit 178. The back cover 22 may be provided with an opening for viewing the board management information display unit 178.

45 to 47 illustrate a second embodiment of the present invention. The third hinge means 21 is provided integrally with the hinge shaft 147 provided integrally with the bent portion side of the back cover 22 and the side wall portion 18 of the back protection portion 14 on the inner frame 3 side, and the hinge shaft 147 is placed on the upper side. It is equipped with a hinge bearing 148 that can be freely inserted and removed.

The outer peripheral surface of the hinge shaft 147 has a substantially circular shape as a whole, and is formed in a circular shape having a diameter substantially the same as that of the insertion head 166 on the intermediate side between the insertion head 166 at the lower end and the support base 165 on the upper end side. The reinforcing portion 286 is provided, and a recess 167 is provided between the insertion head 166 and the reinforcing portion 286, and between the reinforcing portion 286 and the support base portion 165 in a substantially U-shaped cross section. Similar to the first embodiment, the recess 167 is recessed in the radial direction from the front surface side of the hinge shaft 147, and is formed long in the vertical axial direction toward the reinforcing portions 286 on both the upper and lower sides.

The hinge bearing 148 is provided on both the upper and lower sides of the outer peripheral holding portion 287 having a substantially U-shape in a plan view and held on the reinforcing portion 286 side of the hinge shaft 147, and is arranged on the front side of the hinge shaft 147. An arc-shaped front holding portion 288 is provided, and the outer peripheral holding portion 287 and the front holding portion 288 cooperate to hold the hinge shaft 147 rotatably. If the outer peripheral holding portion 287 has a tubular shape sufficient for holding the hinge shaft 147, the front holding portion 288 is unnecessary. The step portion 289 of the hinge bearing 148 receives the support base portion 165 on the hinge shaft 147 side. Other configurations are the same as in the first embodiment.

In this way, when the hinge shaft 147 is provided with the recess 167 to eliminate the molding distortion, in addition to the insertion head 166 on the lower end side, one or more reinforcing portions 286 are provided on the intermediate side in the vertical direction. Therefore, the outer circumference of the hinge shaft 147 can be formed in a substantially circular shape. Therefore, even in the hinge shaft 147 that can be identified with a substantially perfect circle or a substantially perfect circle, it is possible to provide the recess 167 to absorb the molding strain.

48 to 50 illustrate a third embodiment of the present invention. The third hinge means 21 is provided integrally with the hinge shaft 147 provided integrally with the bent portion 145a side of the back cover 22 and the side wall portion 18a of the back protection portion 14 on the inner frame 3 side, and the hinge shaft 147 is placed on the upper side. A hinge bearing 148 that can be freely inserted and removed is provided, and a regulating means 149 for the back cover 22 is provided between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148.

The hinge shaft 147 projects downward from the support base 165, and the portion excluding the insertion head 166 on the lower end side and the reinforcing portion 286 between the insertion head 166 and the support base 165 has a cross-sectional cross section. It is formed, and a vertical recess 167 is provided between the insertion head 166 and the reinforcing portion 286, and between the reinforcing portion 286 and the support base portion 165.

Therefore, in this hinge shaft 147, the entire outer peripheral surface including the insertion head 166 and the reinforcing portion 286 has a substantially circular shape, and four recesses 167 in the circumferential direction are provided on both the upper and lower sides of the reinforcing portion 286. It is formed in the vertical direction.

The hinge bearing 148 has a pair of left and right holding members 290 protruding rearward from the support base portion 169 of the side wall portion 18a of the back protection portion 14, and the hinge shaft 147 can be rotated and inserted / detached between the left and right holding members 290. It is designed to be held in.

The regulating means 149 includes a regulating portion 291 formed on the lower surface of one holding member 290 on the hinge bearing 148 side, a regulating protrusion 292 protruding radially from the hinge shaft 147 on the lower side of the regulating portion 291, and left and right. A notch-shaped release portion 293 formed so that the regulation protrusion 292 can pass up and down is provided between the rear ends of the holding member 290.

Therefore, the regulating means 149 restricts the upward movement of the regulating protrusion 292 by the regulating portion 291 on the lower side of the hinge bearing 148 until the back cover 22 is opened from the closed state to the attachment / detachment position 22B, and the back cover 149 also restricts the movement of the back cover 22 upward. When the 22 is opened to the attachment / detachment position 22B by a predetermined angle, the regulation of the regulation protrusion 292 by the regulation portion 291 is released, and the regulation protrusion 292 corresponds to the release portion 293 between the left and right holding members 290, and the release portion 293 thereof is released. Is designed to pass upward.

When the hinge shaft 147 is provided with the recesses 167 in this way to absorb the molding strain, it is also possible to form the hinge shafts 147 in a cross-shaped cross section and provide a plurality of recesses 167 in the circumferential direction. Further, it is also possible to provide a reinforcing portion 286 in the middle of the hinge shaft 147 and to make the outer peripheral shape other than the reinforcing portion 286 a substantially perfect circle or a shape that can be equated with a substantially perfect circle.

Further, by providing the regulating protrusion 292 on the hinge shaft 147 and providing the regulating portion 291 and the releasing portion 293 on the hinge bearing 148, the regulating means 149 can be incorporated into the third hinge means 21. In this regulating means 149, the regulating portion 291 of the hinge bearing 148 regulates the rise of the regulating protrusion 292 of the hinge shaft 147 until the back cover 22 is opened by a predetermined angle, and the hinge shaft 147 is moved upward from the hinge bearing 148. The back cover 22 cannot be removed by pulling it out. However, if the back cover 22 is opened at a predetermined angle, the regulation protrusion 292 of the hinge shaft 147 corresponds to the release portion 293 of the hinge bearing 148, and the regulation protrusion 292 can pass through the release portion 293. 22 can be removed. When the back cover 22 is attached, it may be performed in the reverse order.

51 to 56 illustrate a fourth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 51 to 54, the third hinge means 21 includes a hinge shaft 147 provided integrally with the bent portion 145a side of the back cover 22, and a side wall portion 18a of the back protection portion 14 on the inner frame 3 side. It is provided with a hinge bearing 148 that is integrally provided and receives the hinge shaft 147 on the upper side so as to be freely insertable and detachable.

Further, in each of the plurality of third hinge means 21 in the vertical direction, the first regulation that regulates the removal of the back cover 22 within the first regulation range 294A close to the closed position 22A between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148. The means 294 and the second regulating means 295 that regulate the removal of the back cover 22 in the second regulating range 295A far from the closed position 22A are provided. It is sufficient that the first regulating means 294 and the second regulating means 295 are in at least one of the plurality of third hinge means 21 in the vertical direction.

Similar to the second embodiment, the hinge shaft 147 includes an insertion head 166 on the lower end side and a recess 167 formed in the vertical direction between the insertion head 166 and the support base 165. The hinge bearing 148 includes a first receiving portion 296a that receives the hinge shaft 147 from the front side, and a second receiving portion 296b that is provided between the first receiving portions 296a and receives the hinge shaft 147 from the rear side.

The first regulating means 294 includes a regulating portion 291 provided on the upper side of the support base portion 165 and a regulating protrusion 292 provided on the hinge bearing 148 side on the upper side of the regulating portion 291, and the back cover 22 is in a closed position. Within the first regulation range 294A from 22A to the first position 22a, the regulation protrusion 292 regulates the rise of the regulation part 291 and the regulation protrusion 292 regulates when the back cover 22 is opened to the first regulation range 294A or more. It is designed to lift the regulation by leaving the section 291. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is opened within the first regulation range 294A, the back cover 22 cannot be removed due to the regulation of the first regulation means 294. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is removed, the back cover 22 is first. It is necessary to open the regulation range of 294A or more.

Even after the regulation is lifted by the first regulating means 294, in the second regulating range 295A from the second position 22b to the third position 22c near the first position 22a, the major axis of the hinge shaft 147 of the second regulating means 295. A second regulating means for the portion 147A to come into contact with the first receiving portion 296a and the second receiving portion 296b of the hinge bearing 148 to regulate the vertical relative sliding between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148. Due to the restricting action of 295, it is possible to prevent the back cover 22 from being unstablely rotated around the hinge shaft 147 and unexpectedly falling off of the back cover 22 due to the hinge shaft 147 coming off.

That is, when the back cover 22 is in the second regulation range 295A, the major axis portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 is the first receiving portion 296a and the second receiving portion 296b of the hinge bearing 148 as shown in FIG. 55. It is approximately the same as the minimum interval 296A or slightly larger than the minimum interval 296A. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is opened to the second regulation range 295A, the sliding portions at both ends of the major axis portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 are the first receiving portion 296a and the second receiving portion 296b of the hinge bearing 148. Since the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 slide relatively around the hinge shaft 147 while abutting against the sliding portion and resisting the frictional resistance, the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 are in the vertical direction. Relative sliding will be regulated.

The short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 has a diameter smaller than the minimum distance 296A of the hinge bearing 148, and the back cover 22 is opened from the first regulation range 294A to the second regulation range 295A to shorten the hinge shaft 147. At a position where the diameter portion 147B corresponds to the minimum distance 296A of the hinge bearing 148, the hinge shaft 147 is vertically inserted and removed from the hinge bearing 148 to attach and detach the back cover 22.

In the second regulation means 295, the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 are tightened in the second regulation range 295A, and the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 are loosened and playable outside the second regulation range 295A. .. Therefore, the tightness of the third hinge means 21 is different from that of the second regulation range 295A in other cases, and when the back cover 22 is in the second regulation range 295A, even if the back cover 22 is forcibly removed, the third hinge The means 21 does not come off.

Therefore, when the back cover 22 is opened to the second regulation range 295A in FIG. 56 for maintenance or the like, even if the back cover 22 comes into contact with the tip end side of the back cover 22, the second regulation means 295 is used. Since the frictional resistance between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 is large, it is possible to prevent the hinge shaft 147 from coming off the hinge bearing 148 and the back cover 22 from unexpectedly falling off.

Further, when the back cover 22 is opened from the first regulation range 294A to the second regulation range 295A, the friction resistance between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 becomes large by the second regulation means 295, and the friction resistance is resisted. Since the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 slide relative to each other around the axis center, it is possible to prevent the back cover 22 in the open state from rotating unstablely around the third hinge means 21.

When the back cover is attached, the hinge shaft 147 may be inserted into the hinge bearing 148 at an open position where the back cover 22 is separated from the first regulation range 294A and the second regulation range 295A. In this open position, the minor axis portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 corresponds to the minimum spacing 296A of the hinge bearing 148, so that the hinge shaft 147 can be easily inserted into the hinge bearing 148.

Further, if the hinge shaft 146 is inserted into the hinge bearing 148 and then the back cover 22 is rotated to the closed position 22A, the sliding portion of the major axis portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 is moved to the hinge bearing 148 by the second regulating means 295. Corresponds to the sliding portion with the minimum distance of 296A, and rotates while resisting the frictional resistance between the two. As a result, when the back cover 22 rotates in the second regulation range 295A around the third hinge means 21 to the closed position 22A, the back cover 22 moves up and down due to play between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148. It is possible to prevent rattling in the direction.

Therefore, it can be said that the back cover 22 is rotated from the second regulation range 295A through the first regulation range 294A to the closed position 22A, but the back cover 22 is in the closed position as compared with the case where the second regulation means 295 is not provided. When 22A is reached, the latch means 24 can be located at or near the mounting hole 153. Therefore, even if the back cover 22 has a relatively low rigidity, the latch means 24 can be easily aligned with the mounting hole 153.

It is also possible to omit the first regulating means 294 and provide a second regulating range 295A in which the second regulating means 295 exerts a regulating function up to the closed position 22A or its vicinity. In this case, since the second regulating means 295 functions to the closed position 22A or its vicinity to regulate the rattling of the third hinge means 21, the positioning of the latch means 24 with respect to the mounting hole 153 becomes easier.

The major axis portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 may be substantially the same as the distance 296A of the hinge bearing 148, or may be slightly larger or smaller than the distance 296A. When the major axis portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 is slightly larger than the spacing 296A, the hinge shaft 147 and / or the hinge bearing 148 may be configured to be elastically deformable in the tightening direction. The first regulation range 294A and the second regulation range 295A may partially overlap, or there may be a slight gap between the first regulation range 294A and the second regulation range 295A.

For example, since the hinge shaft 147 has a U-shaped cross section due to the recess 167 for the purpose of absorbing molding strain, the U-shaped cross section U-shaped by appropriately adjusting the wall thickness of the hinge shaft 147 having a U-shaped cross section. An appropriate elastic force can be provided on the open end side of the character shape. Further, by appropriately adjusting the wall thickness of the U-shaped second receiving portion 296b of the hinge bearing 148, the hinge bearing 148 can be provided with an appropriate elastic force in the front-rear direction.

57 to 61 illustrate a fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the plurality of third hinge means 21 in the vertical direction include a hinge shaft 147 provided on the back cover 22 side and supported by support bases 165 on both upper and lower ends in a double-sided manner. It is provided with a hinge bearing 148 provided on the back protection portion 14 side of the inner frame 3 and which receives the hinge shaft 147 detachably in the radial direction thereof.

As shown in FIG. 61, the hinge shaft 147 is provided with a recess 167 between the upper and lower support bases 165, and has a U-shaped cross section in which the major axis portion 147A and the minor axis portion 147B are formed in the perpendicular direction. Is. Further, in the intermediate portion of the hinge shaft 147, a reinforcing portion 286 also used as a guide is provided in a direction crossing the recess 167.

The hinge bearing 148 has a pair of left and right bearing protrusions 297 projecting rearward from the back protection portion 14 side of the inner frame 3, and a pair of upper and lower connecting portions 298 that connect the upper and lower ends of the bearing protrusion 297 to the left and right. The upper and lower connecting portions 298 are provided with a first receiving portion 298a for holding the hinge shaft 147 from the front side, and the left and right bearing protrusions 297 are provided with a second receiving portion 298b for holding the hinge shaft 147 from the left and right. Between the rear ends of the bearing protrusions 297 of the above, an insertion / removal portion 299 capable of inserting / removing the hinge shaft 147 in the front-rear direction is provided.

The distance 297A between the rear ends of the left and right bearing protrusions 297, that is, the left-right width of the insertion / removal portion 299 is slightly smaller than the dimension of the minor axis portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147, and is rear of the left and right bearing protrusions 297. By elastically deforming one or both of the ends to the outside in the left-right direction, the minor axis portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 can pass back and forth through the insertion / removal portion 299.

The insertion / removal portion 299 may have the same dimensions as the minor diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147. The vertical width of the bearing protrusion 297 is slightly smaller than the distance between the support bases 165, and the relative vertical movement of the third hinge means 21 is regulated between the bearing protrusion 297 and the support bases 165 above and below the bearing protrusion 297. ing.

In the third hinge means 21 having such a configuration, when the back cover 22 is attached via the third hinge means 21, the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 is inserted and removed from the hinge bearing 148 as shown in FIG. After making it correspond to the portion 299, the hinge shaft 147 side is pressed toward the inner frame 3 side in that state. Then, the minor axis portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 elastically deforms the rear end portions of the left and right bearing protrusions 297 of the hinge bearing 148 outward, so that the distance between the rear end portions of the left and right bearing protrusions 297 widens and the minor axis The portion 147B passes through the insertion / removal portion 299 and enters between the left and right bearing protrusions 297, and the hinge shaft 147 is rotatably held by the left and right bearing protrusions 297.

A recess 167 is formed in the hinge shaft 147 to prevent molding distortion, and the cross-sectional shape of the hinge shaft 147 is substantially U-shaped, but since there is a reinforcing portion 286 in the middle of the recess 167. Even when the minor axis portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 passes between the rear ends of the left and right bearing protrusions 297, the rear end corresponding to the open end side of the recess 167 may be caught in the recess 167. Instead, the minor axis portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 can quickly pass between the rear ends of the left and right bearing protrusions 297.

After the minor axis portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 passes through the insertion / detachment portion 299 and enters between the left and right bearing protrusions 297, when the back cover 22 is rotated around the hinge shaft 147, the major axis portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 Corresponds between the left and right bearing protrusions 297, so that the hinge shaft 147 does not fall off from the hinge bearing 148.

In particular, the hinge shaft 147 has a substantially U-shaped cross section due to the recess 167, but since there is a reinforcing portion 286 in the middle of the recess 167, an external force in the compression direction is applied to the major axis portion 147A side of the hinge shaft 147. Even if this happens, the major axis portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 corresponding to the reinforcing portion 286 will not be elastically deformed in the compression direction. Therefore, even though the hinge shaft 147 has the recess 167, the hinge shaft 147 does not unexpectedly fall off from the hinge bearing 148.

When removing the back cover 22, the back cover 22 is opened rearward, the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 is aligned with the insertion / detachment portion 299 of the hinge bearing 148, and the back cover 22 is pulled rearward in that state. For example, the left and right bearing protrusions 297 are elastically deformed outward, and the hinge shaft 147 is detached from the hinge bearing 148, so that the back cover 22 can be easily removed.

In this way, both the upper and lower sides of the hinge shaft 147 can be supported by the support base portion 165 in a double-sided manner. When the back cover 22 is attached to the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3, a plurality of third hinge means 21 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the plurality of third hinge means 21 are provided with the examples in the fifth embodiment. Alternatively, as illustrated in the first embodiment, the third hinge means 21 other than the one may be of a type that is inserted and removed from the upper side.

When the hinge shaft 147 is provided with the recess 167 to prevent molding distortion while increasing the diameter of the hinge shaft 147, it is generally appropriate to arrange one recess 167 in the circumferential direction. It is also possible to arrange a plurality of them in the circumferential direction. When the hinge shaft 147 is provided with the recess 167, the hinge shaft 147 is generally in a substantially elliptical shape having a major axis portion 147A and a minor axis portion 147B, but may be substantially elliptical. It may be configured in a substantially perfect circle. Further, when the hinge shaft 147 is provided with the major axis portion 147A and the minor axis portion 147B, the outer peripheral shape of the hinge shaft 147 is substantially an oval shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially perfect circle shape, or a rounded triangular shape. It may be rectangular or the like.

Even in the state where the regulation is released by the first regulating means 294 that regulates the removal of the back cover 22 until the first angle is opened at a predetermined angle and the first regulating means 294, the back cover is within the range of the first angle to the second angle. A second regulatory means 295 is provided to regulate 22 unexpected dropouts.

The hinge shaft 147 is provided with a recess 167 between the insertion head 166 and the support base 165 as in the first embodiment, and has a cross section in which the major axis portion 147A and the minor axis portion 147B are formed in a right angle direction. It is a U-shaped oval. The hinge bearing 148 includes a pair of upper and lower first receiving portions 296a that receive the hinge shaft 147 from the front side, and a second receiving portion 296b that is provided between the first receiving portions 296a and receives the hinge shaft 147 from the rear side. The first receiving portion 296a and the second receiving portion 296b support the entire circumference of the hinge shaft 147 so as to be rotatable and removable.

The first regulating means 294 includes a regulating portion 291 provided on the upper side of the support base portion 165 and a regulating protrusion 292 provided on the hinge bearing 148 side on the upper side of the regulating portion 291, and the back cover 22 is in a closed state. The regulation protrusion 292 regulates the rise of the regulation portion 291 within the range of opening to the first angle of the predetermined angle, and when the back cover 22 is opened to the first angle or more, the regulation protrusion 292 comes off from the regulation portion 291. The regulation is lifted. Therefore, until the back cover 22 is opened to the first angle or more, the back cover 22 cannot be removed due to the regulation of the first regulating means 294. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is removed, the back cover 22 is first. It is necessary to open more than the angle.

FIG. 62 illustrates a sixth embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, the back cover 22 does not overlap with the main board case 138 (first board case), the payout board case 143 arranged below the main board case 138, and the power supply board case 141, and is on the upper side of the main board case 138. It is designed to overlap and protect the back members such as the effect board case 134 (second board case) and the liquid crystal board case 136 (second board case) arranged on the left and right.

Even in such a back cover 22, a resin pouring portion trace 280 and an extruded portion trace 281 which are traces of the resin molding portion at the time of molding are formed. However, when the back cover 22 does not overlap the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143, the main board 137 in the main board case 138 and the payout board 142 in the payout board case 143 have specific parts to be visually recognized. However, the main substrate case 138, the resin pouring portion trace 280, and the extruded portion trace 281 of the payout substrate case 143 may not overlap each other with respect to the specific portion.

On the other hand, when the back cover 22 overlaps with the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, the effect board 133 in the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board 135 in the liquid crystal board case 136 are required to be visible from the outside. If there is a substrate control number or other specific parts, it is necessary to arrange the resin casting part traces 280 and the extruded part traces 281 at positions that do not overlap with the specific parts.

The back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 has a heat dissipation region 264A having a plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 on the upper side thereof, and a flat non-perforated non-heat dissipation region 264B on the lower side of the heat dissipation region 264A. In the effect substrate 133 in the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate 135 in the liquid crystal substrate case 136, specific parts such as a substrate control number are arranged in a portion corresponding to the non-heat dissipation region 264B of the back cover 22.

The resin pouring portion trace 280 and the extruded portion trace 281 of the back cover 22 are dispersedly arranged on the back surface portion 144. On the heat radiating region 264A side, a large number of resin pouring portion traces 280 and extruded portion traces 281 are dispersedly arranged so as to be located between the heat radiating holes 264. On the non-heat dissipation region 264B side, a smaller number of resin pouring portion traces 280 and extruded portion traces 281 are arranged than on the heat dissipation region 264A side, and the positions of the resin pouring portion traces 280 and the extruded portion traces 281 are not. It is arranged at a position that does not overlap with a specific part such as the component information display unit 179 on the main board 137 side at least, such as being arranged in the peripheral portion of the heat dissipation area 264B.

The number of resin pouring portion traces 192 of the main substrate case 138 is N2 (N2 ≧ 1), for example, one or two, and the number of resin pouring portion traces 90 at the time of molding the back cover 22 is N2 + n4 (n4 ≧ 1). ), For example, about 4 to 6. Of course, the resin pouring portion trace 192 of the main substrate case 138 is arranged so as not to overlap with the specific portion of the main substrate 137, such as by arranging it in the peripheral portion of the main substrate case 138.

When the number of resin pouring portion traces 192 of the main substrate case 138 is N2 (N2 ≧ 1), the number of resin pouring portion traces 207 and 217 on the effect substrate case 134 and / or the liquid crystal substrate case 136 side is N2 + n2. About (n2 ≧ 0) is desirable.

By doing so, even if there is a specific part on the effect board 133 side in the effect board case 134 and there is a specific part on the liquid crystal board 135 side in the liquid crystal board case 136, the specific part via the back cover 22 Visibility can be ensured.

Further, the main board case 138 is detached from the back cover 22, and the main board case 138 is not protected by the back cover 22, but the number of resin pouring portion traces 192 of the main board case 138 is N2 (N2 ≧ 1). Since the number of traces of the resin pouring portion 90 of the back cover 22 is less than N2 + n4 (n4 ≧ 1), the number of weld lines generated is also smaller than that of the back cover 22, and the strength of the main board case 138 is ensured. Can be done.

FIG. 63 illustrates a seventh embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 63, a first regulating means 294 and a second regulating means 295 are provided between the back cover 22 side and the inner frame 3 side of this embodiment.

The first regulating means 294 regulates the removal of the back cover 22 when the back cover 22 is in the vicinity of the closed position 22A between the closed position 22A and the first position 22a. It is composed of a guide rail 49 arranged near the upper side of the back cover 22 and projecting rearward from the back cover 22, and the regulation is released when the back cover 22 is opened beyond the first position 22a. There is.

The second regulating means 295 regulates the removal of the back cover 22 when the back cover 22 is between the closed position 22A and the second position 22b, and the regulation bump provided on the back cover 22 side. It is composed of a portion 292 and a support base portion 165 provided on the hinge shaft 147 side under the regulation protrusion 292 so that the regulation is released when the back cover 22 is opened beyond the second position 22b. It has become.

When removing the back cover 22, the latch means 24 is released, the back cover 22 is opened rearward around the third hinge means 21 until it exceeds the second position 22b, and the back cover 22 is lifted in the opened state. The hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 may be removed from the hinge bearing 148.

However, even if the back cover 22 is opened, if the back cover 22 is closer to the closed position 22A than the first position 22a, even if the back cover 22 is lifted, the first regulating means 294 is on the upper side of the back cover 22. Since there is a guide rail 49 and a second regulating means 295 on the third hinge means 21 side, the back cover 22 cannot be lifted until the hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 is separated from the hinge bearing 148.

While the back cover 22 is closer to the closed position 22A than the first position 22a, only one of the first regulating means 294 and the second regulating means 295 cooperate to regulate the removal of the back cover 22. It is possible to reduce the individual burdens of the first regulating means 294 and the second regulating means 295 as compared with the case of regulating with.

If the back cover 22 is opened beyond the first position 22a, the back cover 22 is removed from the guide rail 49 of the first regulating means 294, so that the regulation of the back cover 22 by the first regulating means 294 is released, but the back cover 22 is released. The second regulating means 295 restricts the removal of the back cover 22 until the cover 22 exceeds the second position 22b. If the back cover 22 is opened until it exceeds the second position 22b, the regulation of the back cover 22 by the second regulating means 295 is released, so that the back cover 22 can be lifted upward, and the hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 can be lifted. Can be removed from the hinge bearing 148 to remove the back cover 22.

64 to 67 illustrate an eighth embodiment of the present invention. In the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the first hinge means 6 for pivotally attaching the inner frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the back cover 22 pivotally attached to the inner frame 3. The third hinge means 21 is arranged on the same side in the left-right direction.

When the first hinge means 6 and the third hinge means 21 are arranged on the same side in the left-right direction in this way, the inner frame 3 is placed on the island equipment 150 side of the game hall with the game machine 1 mounted on the same side. 1 When the hinge means is opened around 6 and then the back cover 22 is opened around the 3rd hinge means 21, the back cover 22 is opened so as to approach the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 65. Therefore, the back side of the gaming machine 1 is largely opened to the passage side between the island equipment 150, and work such as maintenance and inspection can be easily performed.

The back protection portion 14 on the back side of the inner frame 3 is provided with mounting portions 20a and 20b having substantially the same height at the rear ends of the side wall portions 18a and 18b, and the mounting portions 20b on the first hinge means 6 side thereof. Is provided with a payout means 23, a ball supply passage 51, etc. in the extension mounting portion 300, and the back cover 22 is pivotally attached to the extension attachment portion 300 via a pair of upper and lower third hinge means 21 so as to be openable and closable. The back cover 22 is fixed to the mounting portion 20a on the opposite side via the latch means 24.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 that protects back components such as the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, and the main board case 138 from the back side, and the back surface portion 144 from the outer periphery thereof. It has a peripheral portion 145 that is formed in a bent shape on the front side and protects back parts such as the effect board case 134 and the main board case 138 from the outer peripheral side.

Of the peripheral edges 145 of the back cover 22, the bent portion 145a on the opposite side of the first hinge means 6 has a larger bending length toward the front side than the bent portion 145b on the first hinge means 6 side. When fixed by the latch means 24, the front end of the bent portion 145a comes into contact with the mounting portion 20a.

Further, in the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, the upper side corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 is a heat dissipation area 264A having a plurality of heat dissipation holes 264, and the lower part corresponding to the main board case 138. The side is a flat, non-perforated non-heat dissipation region 264B. On the heat radiating region 264A side, a plurality of resin pouring portion traces 280 and extruded portion traces 281 are dispersedly arranged so as to be located between the heat radiating holes 264. Further, on the non-heat dissipation region 264B side, a smaller number of resin pouring portion traces 280 and extruded portion traces 281 are arranged than on the heat dissipation region 264A side, and the positions of the resin pouring portion traces 280 and the extruded portion traces 281 are non-heat dissipation. It is arranged at a position that does not overlap with a specific part such as the opening history notation means 184 of the main substrate 137, such as being arranged in the peripheral portion of the area 264B.

The resin pouring portion trace 280 of the back cover 22 has about 3 to 5 heat dissipation areas 264A including the vicinity side of the non-heat dissipation area 264B, and the number of non-heat dissipation areas 264B including the vicinity side of the heat dissipation area 264A. It is about 1 to 2 pieces. Then, when looking at the distribution of the resin pouring portion traces between the first region 22D on the third hinge means 21 side and the second region 22U on the opposite side with respect to the center line at the center of the back cover 22 substantially on the left and right, the molding mold In order to make the circulation of the molten resin in the cavity for the back cover 22 substantially uniform, the number of the resin pouring portion traces 280 on the second region 22U side, which has a long bending length and a large volume, is bent. The bending length of the portion 145b is short, and the volume is larger than the number of the resin pouring portion traces 280 on the second region 22U side.

Further, when the component information display unit 179 of the integrated circuit device 174 of the main board 137 is designated as a specific portion, the weld line 283 generated between the upper and lower resin pouring portion traces 280 on the non-heat dissipation region 264B side of the back cover 22 is formed. It is placed at a position that does not overlap with a specific part. Of course, the weld line 192b generated between the adjacent resin pouring portion traces 192 of the main substrate case 138 is also arranged at a position that does not overlap with the specific portion.

The extruded portion trace 281a on the back surface portion 144 side of the back cover 22 has a circular shape having substantially the same size, and in the heat radiating region 264A on the back surface portion 144 side, a plurality of extruded portion traces 281a are evenly formed between the heat radiating holes 264. The extruded portions 281a are arranged in a distributed manner on the non-radiating region 264B side on the back surface portion 144 side, and a smaller number of extruded portion traces 281a than on the heat radiating region 264A side are arranged on the peripheral portion of the main board case 138. Extruded portions 281b and 281c are also arranged at the front end of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22, but the extruded portion trace 281b on the bending portion 145b side having a short bending length is semicircular and has a long bending length. The extruded portion trace 281c on the bent portion 145a side has a rectangular shape along the bent portion 145a.

68 to 72 illustrate a ninth embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, a large number of vertically elongated heat radiating holes 264, which are long in the vertical direction, are provided on the upper side of the back cover 22 at predetermined intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. There is. The back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 and a back surface portion 144 that protect the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, the power supply board case 141, the payout board case 143, etc., which constitute the heat-generating back member, from the back side. It has a peripheral wall portion 145 that bends from the outer circumference to the front side to protect the substrate cases 134, 136, 138, 141, 143 from the outer circumference side, and the back surface portion 144 has a vertically long heat dissipation that is long in the vertical direction on the upper side. Holes 264 are provided, and viewing windows 267 to 269 are provided on the lower side.

Of the board cases 134, 136, 138, 141, 143, the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 having high heat generation are arranged higher than the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143 having low heat generation. There is.

The back portion 144 of the back cover 22 is divided into an upper portion 22U corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, and a lower portion 22D corresponding to the main board case 138, the power supply board case 141 and the payout board case 143. In this case, heat dissipation holes 264 are intensively provided in the upper portion 22U of the back surface portion 144 in order to improve the heat dissipation from the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136. The lower portion 22D has a certain amount of viewing windows 267 to 269, and is not provided with a heat radiating hole 264.

Although the viewing windows 267 to 269 of the lower portion 22D also serve as heat dissipation holes, a small number of heat dissipation holes 264 may be arranged in the lower portion 22D of the back surface portion 144.

As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the heat radiating holes 264 are formed in the middle of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 in the plate thickness direction, and both sides of the boundary portion 302 in the plate thickness direction. It has a first outward spreading portion 303 and a second outward spreading portion 304 formed in the opposite direction. The boundary portion 302 has a mountain-shaped cross section, is located inside the center of the back portion 144 in the plate thickness direction (on the front side of the effect board case 134 side), and is abbreviated as the inner side surface 144a and the outer surface 144b of the back surface portion 144. It is provided in parallel. The first outer spreading portion 303 and the second outer spreading portion 304 have a tapered shape with a small diameter on the boundary portion 302 side. The first outer spreading portion 303 is formed from the boundary portion 302 to the inside (front side), and the second outer spreading portion 304 is formed from the boundary portion 302 to the outside (the anti-heating back member side on the back side).

The angle α formed by the inner peripheral surface 303a of the first outer spreading portion 303 and the inner side surface 144a of the back portion 144 is the angle β formed by the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outer spreading portion 304 and the outer surface 144b of the back portion 144. Greater than or formed approximately the same. In the heat radiating hole 264, the inner opening end 303b of the first outer spreading portion 303 is located inside the outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304 in the radial direction, and the second outer expanding portion 304 as a whole is located inside. It has a shape that is wider than the inner first outer spreading portion 303. Therefore, in the heat radiation hole 264, the opening amount 304w in the left-right and vertical directions of the outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304 is larger than the opening amount 303w in the left-right and vertical directions of the inner opening end 303b of the first outer spreading portion 303. Is also getting bigger.

The heat dissipation holes 264 of the back cover 22 having such a configuration are the first outer spreading portion 303 and the first outer spreading portion 303 formed in the opposite direction in the plate thickness direction from the intermediate boundary portion 302 in the plate thickness direction of the back cover 22. Since the back cover 22 has the outer spreading portion 304, the outer peripheral portions of the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat radiating holes 264 that open on both the inner and outer sides of the back cover 22 can be formed in an obtuse angle, and the rigidity of the formed region of the heat radiating holes 264 of the back cover 22 can be formed. Is improved.

Further, since the first outer spread portion 303 and the second outer spread portion 304 are outwardly spread in opposite directions on both sides of the intermediate boundary portion 302 in the plate thickness direction of the back cover 22, the first outer spread portion of the mold is formed. Although the length of each heat radiation hole forming portion on the 303 side and the second outer spreading portion 304 side is shortened, and the outer peripheral portions of the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat radiation hole 264 can be formed in an obtuse angle shape, the back cover 22 The mold release resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the back cover 22 can be easily released from the mold, the production efficiency of the back cover 22 is improved, and the back cover 22 can be prevented from being deformed.

Further, since the outer peripheral portions of the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat radiating hole 264 can be made obtuse, the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat radiating hole 264 may be damaged, or the operator may be injured on the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat radiating hole 264. You can reduce problems such as Further, since the opening amount 304w of the outer opening end 304b of the heat radiating hole 264 is larger than the opening amount 303w of the inner opening end 303b, the heat inside the back cover 22 can be efficiently dissipated.

In particular, the heat radiating hole 264 is a vertically long hole, and the vertically long heat radiating hole 264 is provided with a boundary portion 302, a first outer spreading portion 303, and a second outer spreading portion 304, and an opening of the outer opening end 304b thereof. Since the amount 304w is larger than the opening amount 303w of the inner opening end 303b, the hot air can be quickly discharged to the outside by the convection of the air inside the back cover 22.

FIG. 73 illustrates a modified example of the tenth embodiment. When the back cover 22 is provided with the heat radiating holes 264 provided with the first outer spreading portion 303 and the second outer spreading portion 304 on both sides of the boundary portion 302, the back cover 22 is configured as shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (f). It is also possible. In the heat radiating hole 264 of FIG. 73A, the boundary portion 302 is arranged so as to be displaced to the front side of the center of the plate thickness of the back surface portion 144, and the heat radiation hole 264 is arranged with respect to the inclination angle of the inner peripheral surface 303a of the first outer spreading portion 303. Therefore, the inclination angle of the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outer spreading portion 304 is set to be large. In this case, the opening amount 304w of the outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304 can be increased.

In the heat radiating hole 264 of FIG. 73B, the boundary portion 302 is arranged near the center of the plate thickness of the back surface portion 144, and the second outer spreading portion 303 has a second outer spreading with respect to the inclination angle of the inner peripheral surface 303a of the first outer spreading portion 303. The inclination angle of the inner peripheral surface 304a of the portion 304 is set to be large. Even when the boundary portion 302 is arranged near the center of the plate thickness of the back surface portion 144 in this way, the opening amount 304w of the outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304 can be increased.

The heat dissipation hole 264 of FIG. 73 (c) is substantially entirely tapered except for the opening end 304b side of the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outer spreading portion 304, and is circular on the opening end 304b side of the inner peripheral surface 304a. An arc-shaped curved portion 304c is provided. In the heat radiating hole 264 of FIG. 73 (d), the inner peripheral surfaces 303a and 304a of the first outer spreading portion 303 and the second outer spreading portion 304 are both formed of arcuate curved surfaces. In this way, it is also possible to configure one or both of the first outer spreading portion 303 and the second outer spreading portion 304 in a curved shape.

In the heat radiating hole 264 of FIG. 73 (e), chamfered portions 303d and 304d are formed on the opening ends 303b and 304b of the first outer spreading portion 303 and the second outer spreading portion 304. Therefore, the inner peripheral surfaces 303a and 304a of the first outer spreading portion 303 and the second outer spreading portion 304 are bent at the inner portions excluding the opening ends 303b and 304b sides and the opening ends 303b and 304b sides. Also in this case, since the chamfered portions 303d and 304d are provided on the opening ends 303b and 304b sides, damage or injury on the opening ends 303b and 304b sides of the first outer spreading portion 303 and the second outer spreading portion 304 can be prevented.

In the heat radiating hole 264 of FIG. 73 (f), the boundary portion 302 is arranged closer to the outer surface 144b than the center of the plate thickness of the back surface portion 144, and the opening amount 303w of the inner opening end 303b of the first outer spreading portion 303 is formed. The opening amount of the outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304 is larger than the opening amount 304w. As described above, the heat radiating hole 264 can make the opening amount 303w of the inner opening end 303a of the first outer spreading portion 303 larger than the opening amount 304w of the outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304.

74 and 75 illustrate the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. The back cover 22 of this embodiment has a size that protects the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, and is vertically elongated in the vertical direction on the upper side of the back surface portion 144 as shown in FIG. 74. A large number of heat radiation holes 264 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIGS. 75A and 75B, the heat radiating hole 264 has a boundary portion 302 in the middle of the back cover 22 in the plate thickness direction, and is formed from the boundary portion 302 in an outwardly expanding shape in the opposite direction. It also has a first outer spreading portion 303 and a second outer spreading portion 304.

The first outer spread portion 303 is located on the front side of the back cover 22, the second outer spread portion 304 is located on the rear surface side of the back cover 22, and the outer spread portions 303 and 304 have a smaller diameter on the boundary portion 302 side. The front side opposite to the boundary portion 302, the inner opening end 303a side on the rear surface side, and the outer opening end 304a side have a tapered shape with a large diameter. The first outward spreading portion 303 and the second outward spreading portion 304 may be curved outward.

The angle α formed by the inner peripheral surface 303a of the first outer spreading portion 303 on the front surface side and the inner side surface 144a of the back cover 22 is the angle α between the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outer spreading portion 304 and the outer surface 144b of the back cover 22. It is larger than the suspended angle β. The angle α and the angle β may be substantially the same.

The heat radiating hole 264 has a stepped portion 302a at the boundary portion 302 between the first outer expanding portion 303 and the second outer expanding portion 304, and the first outer expanding portion 303 and the second outer expanding portion 303 pass through the stepped portion 302a. 304 is continuous in the opposite direction. The step portion 302a is substantially parallel to the inner side surface 144a and the outer surface 144b of the back surface portion 144, and is provided closer to the outer surface 144b than the center of the back surface portion 144 in the plate thickness direction.

The outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304 is located outside the inner opening end 303b of the first outer spreading portion 303, and is located in the left-right direction and the vertical direction of the outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304. The opening amount 304w is larger than the opening amount 303w in the left-right direction and the vertical direction of the inner opening end 303b of the first outer spreading portion 303.

As described above, the heat radiating hole 264 can form the boundary portion 302 by the stepped portion 302a substantially parallel to the back surface portion 144. Therefore, even in such a case, the same effect as that of the ninth embodiment can be obtained.

76 and 77 illustrate the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, which is a modification of the eleventh embodiment. The back cover 22 of this embodiment has a size that protects the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, and as shown in FIG. 76, the back cover portion 144 has a vertically long heat radiation hole 264 that is long in the vertical direction. Are provided substantially uniformly dispersed at predetermined intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions.

As shown in FIG. 77, the heat radiating hole 264 has a boundary portion 302 in the middle of the back cover 22 in the plate thickness direction, and the first outer spreading portion formed in a front-rear opposite direction from the boundary portion 302. It has a 303 and a second outer spreading portion 304.

The first outer spreading portion 303 is located on the effect board case 134 side which is the front side of the back cover 22, and the second outer spreading portion 304 is located on the rear surface side of the back cover 22, and the outer spreading portions 303, respectively. The 304 has a tapered shape in which the boundary portion 302 side has a small diameter, and the front side opposite to the boundary portion 302, the inner opening end 303b side on the rear surface side, and the outer opening end 304b side have a large diameter. The first outward spreading portion 303 and the second outward spreading portion 304 may be curved outward.

The angle α formed by the inner peripheral surface 303a of the first outer spreading portion 303 on the front surface side and the inner side surface 144a of the back cover 22 is the angle α between the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outer spreading portion 304 and the outer surface 144b of the back cover 22. Although it is larger than the formed angle β, it is much smaller than the formed angle α in this embodiment, and the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outer spreading portion 304 is greatly inclined. The angle α and the angle β may be substantially the same.

The heat radiating hole 264 has a stepped portion 302a at the boundary portion 302 between the first outer expanding portion 303 and the second outer expanding portion 304, and the first outer expanding portion 303 and the second outer expanding portion 304 pass through the stepped portion 302a. And are continuous in the opposite directions. The step portion 302a is substantially parallel to the inner side surface 144a and the outer surface 144b of the back surface portion 144, and is provided closer to the outer surface 144b than the center of the back surface portion 144 in the plate thickness direction.

The outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304 is located outside the inner opening end 303b of the first outer spreading portion 303, and is located in the left-right direction and the vertical direction of the outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304. The opening amount 304w is larger than the opening amount 303w in the left-right direction and the vertical direction of the inner opening end 303b of the first outer spreading portion 303.

In the heat radiating hole 264 configured in this way, the outer opening end 304b of the second outer spreading portion 304 is located on the outer side larger than the inner opening end 303b of the first outer spreading portion 303, so that the outer side of the second outer spreading portion 304 is located. The opening amount 304w in the left-right direction and the up-down direction of the opening end 304b can be increased.

In either case of the heat radiating hole 264 of FIG. 75 and the heat radiating hole 264 of FIG. 77, the inner opening end 303b side and the outer opening end 304b side can be configured in an arc shape or a chamfered shape.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back portion 144 of the back cover 22 is attached to the upper portion 22U corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, the power supply board case 141, and the payout board case 143. It can be roughly divided into the corresponding lower portion 22D. When providing the heat dissipation holes 264 on the back surface 144 of the back cover 22, from the viewpoint of ensuring an efficient heat dissipation effect, the production board case is larger than the number of heat dissipation holes 264 arranged in the vicinity of the main board case 138. It is desirable that the number of heat radiating holes 264 is concentrated on the upper portion 22U of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, such as increasing the number of heat radiating holes 264 arranged in the vicinity of 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136.

Therefore, when the distribution of the heat radiating holes 264 is compared separately for the upper portion 22U and the lower portion 22D, the heat radiating holes 264 are provided in substantially the entire area of the upper portion 22U without being provided in the lower portion 22D of the back portion 144. It may be arranged so as to be distributed substantially evenly.

Of course, the lower portion 22D of the back surface portion 144 may be provided with less heat dissipation holes 264 than the upper portion 22U. In addition to making a difference in the number of heat dissipation holes 264 between the upper portion 22U and the lower portion 22D of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, the opening amount of the heat dissipation hole 264 of the upper portion 22U is made different. It may be larger than the opening amount of the heat radiating hole 264 of the lower portion 22D.

78 to 101 illustrate the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 78 to 81, the gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3 arranged on the front side of the outer frame 2, and the front door 4 opens and closes on the front side of the inner frame 3. It is arranged freely. The gaming machine frames 2 and 3 are composed of the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3. The gaming machine frames 2 and 3 may be configured by something other than the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3, for example, a housing whose front side is open.

The inner frame 3 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge means 6 so as to be openable and closable and detachable, and is closed to the outer frame 2 by the first locking means 73 opposite to the first hinge means 6. It can be locked in the state. The front door 4 is pivotally attached to the inner frame 3 via the second hinge means 7 so as to be openable and closable and detachable, and is closed to the inner frame 3 by the second locking means 74 on the opposite side of the second hinge means 7. It can be locked in the state.

The outer frame 2 connects a pair of left and right vertical frame members 9, an upper horizontal frame member 10 that connects the upper ends of the left and right vertical frame members 9 to the left and right, and a lower end of the left and right vertical frame members 9 to the left and right. The lower horizontal frame member 11 and the decorative member 12 arranged on the front side of the lower horizontal frame member 11 and connecting the left and right vertical frame members 9 form a rectangular shape.

The inner frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion 13 and a back protection portion 14 integrally on the upper side, and a lower mounting portion 15 is integrally provided on the lower side of the game board mounting portion 13. The game board 16 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting portion 13 from the front side. The back protection portion 14 protects the back side mechanism 17 arranged on the back side of the game board 16 from the outer peripheral side. The lower mounting portion 15 is provided with a game ball launching means 25, a lower speaker 25b, and the like.

The front door 4 has a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the inner frame 3, and a viewing window 53 for visually recognizing the game area 26 of the game board 16 is provided on the upper side. The front door 4 includes a rectangular door frame 55, a lower unit 56 mounted on the front surface of the door frame 55, a first upper unit 57, and a second upper unit 58.

The lower unit 56 is arranged below the viewing window 53 and in front of the door frame 55, and the first upper unit 57 is arranged vertically on the first hinge means 6 side of the viewing window 53. The second upper unit 58 straddles the left-right direction on the upper side of the viewing window 53 and the vertical direction on the opposite side of the first hinge means 6 of the viewing window 53, and is on the front surface of the door frame 55 in an L-shape in front view. It is arranged so that it can be attached and detached.

The viewing window 53 is closed by a glass unit (transparent plate unit) 75 detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 55. The glass unit 75 includes two front and rear glass plates capable of seeing through the game area 26 and a holding frame for holding the outside of the two front and rear glass plates, and is detachably fixed to the back side of the front door 4. There is.

The lower unit 56 has a substantially triangular shape in a plan view in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and stores the first operation effect means 46, the upper plate 52 for storing the game balls for launching the launch means 25, and the surplus balls. A lower plate (surplus ball storage portion) 61 and a lower cover 62 covering the outer peripheral side thereof are provided, and the first operation effect means 46 is launched for the launching means 25 on the opposite side to the upper plate 52 and the like. A handle 63 is provided.

The first upper unit 57 includes a side cover 93 on the front side that is long in the vertical direction and an LED-type light emitting effect means (not shown) arranged on the back side of the side cover 93, and emits light at a predetermined effect. A predetermined portion of the side cover 93 emits light by the light from the means.

The second upper unit 58 includes a horizontal main body portion 95 in the left-right direction arranged on the upper side of the viewing window 53, a vertical main body portion 96 in the vertical direction arranged on the right side of the viewing window 53, and a central portion of the horizontal main body portion 95. A movable effect means 97 arranged so as to be movable in the front-rear direction and a second operation effect means 47 arranged substantially in the vertical center of the vertical main body 96 are provided, and the door is provided via a mounting means such as an engaging means. It is detachably attached to the front surface of the frame 55.

The hinge means 6 and 7 are configured as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83. That is, the first hinge means 6 includes an upper first hinge mechanism 307 and a lower first hinge mechanism 308, and the second hinge means 7 includes an upper second hinge mechanism 309 and a lower second hinge mechanism 310. There is.

As shown in FIG. 82, the upper first hinge mechanism 307 includes a fixed hinge tool 311 fixed to the outer frame 2 and having a hinge hole 311a, and a hinge fixed to the inner frame 3 and fitted into the hinge hole 311a from above. It is provided with a movable hinge tool 312 having a shaft 312a. As shown in FIG. 83, the lower first hinge mechanism 308 fits the fixed hinge tool 313 fixed to the outer frame 2 and having the hinge shaft 313a and the hinge shaft 313a fixed to the inner frame 3 from the lower side. It is provided with a combined hinge tool 314 having a hinge hole 314a. The movable hinges 312 and the combined hinges 314 of the first hinge mechanisms 307 and 308 are slidably supported around the hinge shafts 312a and 313a by the fixed hinges 311, 313.

As shown in FIG. 82, the upper second hinge mechanism 309 fits into the fixed hinge tool 315 fixed to the inner frame 3 and having the hinge hole 315a and the hinge hole 315a fixed to the front door 4 from below. It is provided with a movable hinge tool 316 having a hinge shaft 316a. The movable hinge tool 316 is configured in a U shape, and a hinge shaft 316a is inserted into the movable hinge tool 316 so as to be slidable up and down, and is urged upward by a spring 316b. The hinge shaft 316a has an operation portion 316c that bends in an L shape from the lower side, and the hinge shaft 316a can be operated in the insertion / removal direction with respect to the hinge hole 315a by operating the operation portion 316c.

As shown in FIG. 83, the lower second hinge mechanism 310 includes a hinge tool 314 on the inner frame 3 side having a hinge shaft 317a and a hinge hole 318a fixed to the front door 4 into which the hinge shaft 317a is fitted from below. It is provided with a movable hinge tool 318 having the above. The combined hinge tool 314 also serves as a movable side of the lower first hinge mechanism 308 and a fixed side of the lower second hinge mechanism 310, and the inside of the cylindrical portion fixed to the combined hinge mechanism 314 is a hinge hole. The outside of the 314a functions as a hinge shaft 317a. The movable hinges 316 and 318 of the second hinge mechanisms 309 and 310 are slidably supported around the hinge shafts 316a and 317a by the fixed hinges 315 and the combined hinges 314.

The first locking means 73 and the second locking means 74 are configured as shown in FIGS. 84 to 89, and are formed in a locking accommodating portion 319 formed at an end opposite to the hinge means 6 and 7 of the inner frame 3. Correspondingly, it is provided so as to straddle the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3, the inner frame 3 and the front door 4. As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the lock accommodating portion 319 is provided in the vertical direction at the end of the inner frame 3, and a support member having an L-shaped cross section having an attachment portion 320a and a support portion 320b inside thereof. A 320 and a protective member 321 mounted on the support member 320 from the back side are provided, and an interlocking member 322 is provided in the vertical direction between the support member 320 and the protective member 321.

As shown in FIGS. 84, 86, and 89, the first locking means 73 is provided on the inner frame 3 side and a pair of upper and lower first receivers 323 fixed inside the vertical frame member 9 of the outer frame 2. It also has a pair of upper and lower first hooks 324 that are detachably engaged with the first receiver 323 from below. Each first hook 324 is rotatably and pivotally supported by a support portion 320b of the support member 320 by a support shaft 325 in the left-right direction, and is wound around the support shaft 325 and provided between the support portion 320b and the string winding spring 326. Is urged in the engaging direction.

The first hook 324 comes into contact with the engaging portion 324a that engages with the first receiver 323 and the first receiver 323 when the inner frame 3 is closed, and the first hook 324 resists the string-wound spring 326. It has a guide portion 324b that rotates around the support shaft 325.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 84 and 87, the second locking means 74 includes a plurality of second receivers 328 bent in the reinforcing member 327 on the back side of the door frame 55 of the front door 4 in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of second hooks 329 provided on the inner frame 3 side and engaged with the second receiver 328 from the lower side so as to be engaged and disengaged from the lower side in the vertical direction. Each of the second hooks 329 is rotatably and pivotally supported by the support portion 320b of the support member 320 on the inner frame 3 side by the support shaft 330 in the left-right direction, and is hooked between the support portion 320b and the spring hook portion 320c. It is urged in the engaging direction by the tension spring 331.

Each second hook 329 comes into contact with the engaging portion 329a that engages with the second receiver 328 and the second receiver 328 when the front door 4 is closed, and the second hook 329 is brought into the tension spring 331. It has a guide portion 329b that rotates around the support shaft 330 against it. The second receiving tool 328 and the second hanging tool 329 are provided at three places of the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage because the strength of the front door 4 is lower than that of the inner frame 3, but they may be provided at two locations above and below. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 and 90 to 92, the first hook 324 of the first locking means 73 and the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74 are released by an interlocking member 322. When the operation key 334, which is interlocked with the 333 and inserted into the cylinder lock 336 of the release operation mechanism 333, is operated in the direction indicated by the arrow A, the first hook 324 of the first locking means 73 is pressed via the interlocking member 322. When the operation key 334 is operated in the release direction in the direction indicated by the arrow B, the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74 can be individually operated in the release direction via the interlocking member 322.

The interlocking member 322 has elongated guide holes 335a formed in the vertical direction at a plurality of positions in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the support portion 320b side and slides up and down by the guide pins 335b inserted into the guide holes 335a. It is freely supported and urged to a neutral position in the vertical direction by the urging means 337. The guide hole 335a and the guide pin 335b constitute a guide means 335 of the interlocking member 322.

The interlocking member 322 has a first operation unit 338 corresponding to the first hook 324 of the first locking means 73, and a second operation unit 339 corresponding to the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74. When the locking means 73 and 74 are in the locked state, they are held in a neutral position by the urging means 337, the first operating unit 338 is in the vicinity of the first hanging tool 324, and the second operating unit 339 is in the second hooking tool 329. Corresponds to each of the neighborhoods of.

Then, when unlocking the inner frame 3 by the first locking means 73, when the operation key 334 is operated in the direction indicated by the arrow A, the interlocking member 322 operates in the ascending direction from the neutral position, and the first operation thereof. Since the portion 338 operates the first hook 324, the first hook 324 rotates around the support shaft 325 against the string winding spring 326 and is released from the first receiver 323.

Further, when unlocking the front door 4 by the second locking means 74, when the operation key 334 is operated in the direction indicated by the arrow B, the interlocking member 322 operates in the downward direction from the neutral position, and the second operation unit thereof. Since the 339 operates the second hook 329, the second hook 329 rotates around the support shaft 330 against the tension spring 331 and is released from the second receiver 328.

As shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the urging means 337 is hooked between a pair of upper and lower spring hooks 341 and 342 fitted in the urging holes 340 of the interlocking member 322 and both spring hooks 341 and 342. It has an attached tension spring 343. Each of the spring hooks 341 and 342 has engaging portions 341a and 342a that bend from the side opposite to the tension spring 343 to the support member 320 side, and the engaging portions 341a and 342a are each locking portion 341b of the interlocking member 322. , 342b, and the support member 320 can be engaged with the locking portions 341c and 342c, respectively.

The locking portions 341b and 342b of the interlocking member 322 and the locking portions 341c and 342c of the support member 320 are substantially the same distance in the vertical direction, and when the interlocking member 322 is in the neutral position, the upper and lower spring hooks 3411 The engaging portions 341a and 342a of the 342 engage with the locking portions 341c and 342c of the interlocking member 322 and the support member 320, and the interlocking member 322 is held in the neutral position by the tension spring 343 via the spring hooks 341 and 342. do.

In the urging means 337, if the interlocking member 322 rises when the first locking means 73 is released, the upper locking portion 341b pushes up the engaging portion 341a of the upper spring hook 341, so that the tension spring 343 Bounces the interlocking member 322 in the return direction (downward direction) to return it to the neutral position. If the interlocking member 322 is lowered when the second locking means 74 is released, the lower locking portion 342b becomes the engaging portion of the lower spring hook 342, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 93 and 94. In order to push down the 342a downward, the tension spring 343 urges the interlocking member 322 in the return direction (upward direction) to return the interlocking member 322 to the neutral position. Therefore, one tension spring 343 can urge the interlocking member 322 up and down in two different directions.

As shown in FIGS. 86 and 90 to 92, the release operation mechanism 333 corresponds to the driven side cooperation unit 344 provided on the lower front side of the interlocking member 322 on the inner frame 3 side and the cooperation unit 344. A drive-side interlocking member 345 that is provided on the back side of the door frame 55 of the front door 4 so as to be movable in the vertical direction and engages with the interlocking portion 344 in a retractable manner from the front side when the front door 4 is closed, and a front. A cylinder lock 336 fixed to the door frame 55 of the door 4 in the front-rear direction, and an operation shaft 346 that protrudes rearward from the cylinder lock 336 and can be operated in the forward and reverse directions by the operation key 334 inserted into the cylinder lock 336 from the front side. It is provided with an engaging tool 347 that is fixed to the operating shaft 346 and engages the interlocking member 345 so as to be able to operate up and down.

The linking portion 344 projects forward from the opening 348 of the inner frame 3 and is provided in the left-right direction facing the interlocking member 322. The cylinder lock 336 is fixed to the door frame 55 of the front door 4 via the mounting base 349. The mounting base 349 has a support portion 349a that is bent rearward and arranged in the vertical direction, and the linking member 345 moves up and down on the support portion 349a via a pair of upper and lower guide means 350 by a guide pin 350a and a guide hole 350b. It is provided so as to be slidable in the direction. The cooperation member 345 is formed in a U shape that opens on the rear side, and cooperates with the cooperation engagement portion 345a in which the cooperation portion 344 engages with each other in the front-rear direction when the front door 4 is closed to the inner frame 3 side. It has a pair of upper and lower guide portions 345b that guide the portion 344 into the cooperative engagement portion 345a.

The interlocking member 345 and the interlocking member 322 can move up and down in cooperation with the vertical movement of the interlocking member 345 when the interlocking portion 344 is located in the interlocking engaging portion 345a, and the second locking means 74 When the front door 4 is opened from the closed state to the stop position Y near the front side of the inner frame 3, the cooperation portion 344 is disengaged from the cooperation engagement portion 345a to the rear side, so that the cooperation member 345 moves up and down. However, the interlocking member 322 cannot be interlocked and does not move up and down.

The linking member 345 is urged to a neutral position by the tension spring 351a of the urging means 351. The engaging tool 347 has engaging portions 347a and 347b that engage with the engaged portion 345c of the linking member 345 from both upper and lower sides, and is engaged by forward and reverse rotation around the operating shaft 346 of the engaging tool 347. The linking member 345 can be operated in two directions up and down via the joints 347a and 347b. In principle, the urging means 351 is the same as the urging means 337.

An opening / closing detecting means 354 that can detect the opening / closing of the inner frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the opening / closing of the front door 4 with respect to the inner frame 3 is provided at the upper end portion of the inner frame 3 on the opposite side to the hinge means 6 and 7. There is. As shown in FIG. 79, the open / close detection means 354 includes a detection switch 355 having detection units 355a and 355b protruding from both front and rear sides, and when the inner frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the detection unit is provided. When 355b abuts on the abutting portion 356 of the outer frame 2 to detect the closed state of the inner frame 3 and closes the front door 4 with respect to the inner frame 3, the detecting portion 355a abuts on the front door 4. It comes into contact with the portion 357 to detect the closed state of the front door 4.

Between the inner frame 3 and the front door 4, when the front door 4 in the open state is closed around the second hinge means 7, the front door 4 is gradually moved as the front door 4 rotates toward the inner frame 3. When the first lifting means 359 to be lifted and the second locking means 74 are locked with the front door 4 closed, the second lifting means 360 that lifts and supports the front door 4 to the regular locking height with respect to the inner frame 3. And the front door stopping means 361 that stops the front door 4 at the stop position Y near the front side of the inner frame 3 when the front door 4 is unlocked by the second locking means 74. The front door 4 is in a half-opened state when stopped at the stop position Y. Therefore, the stop position Y is also a half-open position of the front door 4.

As shown in FIGS. 80, 86, 95, and 96, the first lifting means 359 includes a receiving member 362 horizontally provided on the lower end side of the inner frame 3 in the left-right direction, and a lower surface side of the front door 4. It has a lower surface member 363 arranged in the left-right direction facing the receiving member 362, and an inclined guide portion 364 that rises backward and is provided on the receiving member 362 at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction.

If there is such a first lifting means 359, the front door 4 rotates toward the inner frame 3 side when the front door 4 is rotated around the second hinge means 7 toward the inner frame 3 side and closed. According to this, the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 rides on the inclined guide portion 364 far from the inclined guide portion 364 near the second hinge means 7, and thereby receives the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 and sequentially lifts it onto the member 362. Can be done. Therefore, even if the side of the front door 4 opposite to the second hinge means 7 is in a hanging state, the front door 4 can be easily closed.

At the lower end of the front door 4, there is a step portion 365 that is close to or abuts on the front side of the receiving member 362 to prevent fraudulent acts, and a lower surface member 363 is provided near the upper side of the step portion 365. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a fraudulent member from the lower side of the inner frame 3 and the front door 4.

As shown in FIGS. 80, 81, and 96, the second lifting means 360 is arranged at an end opposite to the second hinge means 7, and has a lifting receiving portion 367 formed on the inner frame 3 side. The front door 4 has a lifting protrusion 368 formed on the front door 4 side, and when the front door 4 is closed, the lifting protrusion 368 is lifted by the lifting receiving portion 367 to bring the front door 4 to a regular locking height. It is designed to be lifted and supported. Therefore, when the front door 4 is locked by the second locking means 74, the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 does not always rest on the inclined guide portion 364 of the receiving member 362.

As shown in FIGS. 80, 81, and 96, the front door stopping means 361 lowers the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 and the contact portion 363a at the end opposite to the second hinge means 7 of the lower surface member 363. A receiving member 362 on the inner frame 3 side that receives from the side is provided. Then, the front door stopping means 361 is in a half-opened state when the side opposite to the hinge means 7 side (second locking means 74 side) of the front door 4 is opened to the front side from the closed position X to the stop position Y. A receiving member 362 on the inner frame 3 side that receives the contact portion 363a at the end opposite to the second hinge means 7 of the lower surface member 363 from the lower side is provided, and the front door 4 is stopped when the front door 4 is opened. It is configured to temporarily stop at position Y in a half-open state.

As shown in FIGS. 80, 81, and 96, the front door stopping means 361 receives the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 and the end portion of the lower surface member 363 opposite to the second hinge means 7 from the lower side. It is provided with a receiving member 362 on three sides. Then, in the front door stopping means 361, when the front door 4 is opened as shown in FIG. 100, the side opposite to the hinge means 7 side (second locking means 74 side) of the front door 4 is stopped from the closed position X. When the door is opened to the front side up to Y and the door is half-opened, the receiving member 362 on the inner frame 3 side receives at least the contact portion 363a at the end opposite to the second hinge means 7 of the lower surface member 363 from below. It is configured as follows.

In the closed state in which the front door 4 is closed to the inner frame 3 side, the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74 engages with the second receiver 328 to lock the front door 4. Then, the open / close detecting means 354 detects the closed state of the front door 4.

When opening the front door 4, the operation key 334 inserted in the cylinder lock 336 is operated in the direction indicated by the arrow B to unlock the front door 4 by the second locking means 74. In this case, when the operation key 334 is operated in the direction indicated by the arrow B, the engaging tool 347 rotates in the same direction around the operation shaft 346, and the cooperation member 345 descends. When the linking member 345 is lowered, the linking member 322 is lowered to the linking engaging portion 345a of the linking member 345 via the linking section 344, and the second operating section 339 thereof attaches the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74. In order to operate downward, the second hook 329 rotates around the support shaft 330 against the tension spring 331. Then, when the second hook 329 rotates, it is disengaged from the second receiver 328, so that the front door 4 can be unlocked substantially at the same time by the second locking means 74 at three locations in the vertical direction.

Since the second upper unit 58 and the like projecting forward from the door frame 55 are located above the front door 4, the center of gravity G of the front door 4 is a second hinge as shown in FIGS. 99A and 99B. It is located around an intermediate position in the left-right direction away from the means 7 toward the second locking means 74, and further separated from the line segment (plane) connecting the upper and lower second hinge means 7 and the second locking means 74 to the front side. It will be located in the position.

Therefore, when all three second locking means 74 are removed in the vertical direction and the front door 4 is unlocked, the front door 4 is affected by the moment in the opening direction around the second hinge means 7 due to its own weight. Around the second hinge means 7, it rotates slightly forward toward the closed position X in the opening direction. Then, when the front door 4 slightly rotates around the second hinge means 7 in the opening direction, the lifting protrusion 368 of the second lifting means 360 comes off from the lifting receiving portion 367 as shown in FIG. 98. Therefore, the front door 4 is in a cantilevered state by the second hinge means 7, and the weight of the front door 4 itself causes the second locking means 74 side of the front door 4 to hang downward.

Then, when the front door 4 rotates to the stop position Y and the second locking means 74 side of the front door 4 hangs downward by an inclination angle α as shown in FIG. 99A, the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 is hung down. As shown in FIG. 98, the contact portion 363a of the front door comes into contact with the receiving member 362 of the inner frame 3, so that the front door 4 can be stopped at the stop position by the front door stopping means 361.

As a result, if there is an administrator, a player, or the like in the open area around the front side of the front door 4, the front door 4 may be accidentally unlocked by the second locking means 74. However, it is possible to prevent injuries and the like caused by the front door 4 that opens to the front side.

On the other hand, when the three second locking means 74 in the vertical direction of the front door 4 are in the released state, one end side of the front door 4 is in a state of being supported by the two upper and lower second hinge means 7, so that the upper and lower sides are supported by the two upper and lower hinge means 7. The load of the entire front door 4 is supported by the two second hinge means 7 and the front door stopping means 361. At this time, the center of gravity G of the entire front door 4 is located in front of the line segment (plane) connecting the two upper and lower hinge means 7 and the front door stopping means 361, and is on the side of the two upper and lower second hinge means 7. As a fixed point, the front door 4 itself is distorted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the upper end side of the end of the front door 4 on the second locking means 74 side opposite to the second hinge means 7 is inside. The lower end side is separated from the frame 2 to the front side and is close to the inner frame 2 side to exhibit a forward leaning posture with an inclination angle β, a forward force is applied to the upper end side, and a backward force is applied to the lower end side.

As a result, when looking at the relationship between the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 of the front door stopping means 361 and the receiving member 362, the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 hits the receiving member 362 while receiving a backward force. Since they are in contact with each other, the receiving member 362 can easily receive the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363, and the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 does not inadvertently come off from the lower surface member 363 to the front side. Therefore, when the front door 4 is in the half-opened state, the front door 4 can be stably stopped at the stop position by the front door stopping means 361.

When the front door 4 is stopped in the half-opened state at the stop position by the front door stopping means 361, the second hook 329 of the lowermost second locking means 74 among the upper and lower three second locking means 74 is shown in FIG. 101. As shown in the above, the interlocking member 322 is in a lowered state, such as contacting the lower side of the second receiver 328. Therefore, in combination with the fact that the second locking means 74 side is tilted forward, the cooperation between the cooperation engaging portion 345a and the cooperation portion 344 of the cooperation member 345 is released, and even if the operation key 334 is operated, the cooperation is released. The interlocking member 322 does not move up and down.

Therefore, when the front door 4 is in the stopped state at the stop position, even if the operation key 344 is operated in the direction indicated by the arrow A, the interlocking member 322 does not interlock and rise, and the first locking means. It is not possible to release 73 to release the inner frame 3 from the outer frame 2.

When opening both the inner frame 3 and the front door 4, the first locking means 73 is first released to release the inner frame 3 from the outer frame 2, and then the second locking means 74 is released to release the front door 4. You just have to open.

When opening the front door 4 in the stopped state, if an appropriate portion of the end of the front door 4 on the second locking means 74 side is grasped and pulled forward, the front door 4 can be moved around the second hinge means 7. It can be opened to the fully open position. Also in this case, in the front door stopping means 361, since the lower surface member 363 is only mounted on the receiving member 362, the lower surface member 363 can be easily removed from the receiving member 362.

When the front door 4 is in the half-open state, the distance between the inner frame 3 and the front door 4 is widened, so that the open / close detecting means 354 can reliably detect the opening of the front door 4.

FIG. 102 illustrates a 14th embodiment which is a modification of the 11th embodiment. Also in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the front door stopping means 361 has a receiving member 362 on the inner frame 3 side and a lower surface member 363 on the front door 4 side mounted on the receiving member 362. When the front door 4 is located at the stop position X, the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 is received by the member 362 and stopped. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), the lower surface member 363 is elongated rearward so that its rear end approaches the upright portion 362a on the rear end side of the receiving member 362 of the inner frame 3, while the lower surface 363b of the lower surface member 363 is brought closer. It is configured to be substantially flush with the lower end surface of the front door 4.

By approaching the rear end of the lower surface member 363 to the upright portion 362a on the rear end side of the receiving member 362 in this way, the insertion of the illegal member from between the receiving member 362 and the upright portion 362a and the lower surface member 363 is prevented. Therefore, it is also possible to omit the step portion 365 at the lower part of the front door 4.

The front door stopping means 361 may stop the front door 4 by frictional resistance between the receiving member 362 and the lower surface member 363, or the receiving member 362 and the lower surface member 363 may be engaged in the front-rear direction. The front door 4 may be stopped accordingly. The contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 may be configured to be inclined so as to be in surface contact with the upper surface of the inclined guide portion 364. The position of the center of gravity G of the front door 4 is merely an example, and is not limited to this position.

Further, at the stop position Y, the front door 4 is half-opened with respect to the inner frame 3, and the contact portion 363a at the end opposite to the second hinge means 7 of the front door 4 is received by the member 362. The stop position Y can be a position where the front door 4 is opened more than the half-opened state. The stop position Y needs to be set so that there is no problem in unexpectedly opening the front door 4.

103 to 105 exemplify the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. The back cover 22 shows an example of a game component, and as shown in FIGS. 103 and 105, a large number of vertically elongated heat radiating holes 264 long in the left-right direction are provided at predetermined intervals in the up-down and left-right directions. Has been done. The back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 that protects the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, etc. that constitute the heat-generating back member from the back side, and a substrate that is bent from the outer periphery of the back surface portion 144 to the front side. It has a peripheral wall portion 145 that protects the cases 134, 136, 138 and the like from the outer peripheral side, and the back portion 144 is provided with a horizontally long heat radiation hole 264 that is long in the left-right direction on the upper side and a viewing window 267 on the lower side. It is provided.

Of the substrate cases 134, 136, and 138, the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136 having high heat generation are arranged higher than the main substrate case 138 and the payout substrate case 143 having low heat generation.

The back portion 144 of the back cover 22 has an upper portion 22U corresponding to the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136, and a lower portion 22D corresponding to the main substrate case 138 from the lower side of the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136. When divided into two parts, heat dissipation holes 264 are intensively provided in the upper portion 22U of the back surface portion 144 in order to improve the heat dissipation from the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136. The lower portion 22D has a viewing window 267 to some extent and is not provided with a heat radiating hole 264. Therefore, in the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, the upper portion 22U having a large number of heat dissipation holes 264 becomes the heat dissipation region 264A, and the non-perforated lower portion 22D having no opening other than the viewing window 267 becomes the non-heat dissipation region 264B. ing.

The back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 has traces of the first to fifth resin pouring portions G11, G21, G31, G41, and G51, and when the back cover 22 is molded, the traces of the first to fifth resin pouring portions G11 to G51 are present. The molten resin is poured into the molding space of the mold from the first to fifth resin pouring portions G1 to G5 corresponding to the above at substantially the same time for molding.

When the first to fifth resin g1 to g5 are poured into the first to fifth resin pouring portions G1 to G5 at substantially the same time, the first to fifth resin g1 to g5 are poured from the back surface portion 144 of the mold. It is arranged so as to efficiently fill the molding space straddling the entire peripheral wall portion 145, and the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 are arranged on the large non-radiating area 264B side, and the area is large. The fourth and fifth resin pouring portions G4 and G5 are arranged on the narrow heat dissipation area 264A side of the above. Since the lengths of the left and right bent portions 145a and 145b are different from each other, the peripheral wall portion 145 is arranged to be displaced toward the long bent portion 145a.

The first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the intermediate portion in the vertical direction of the non-radiating region 264B, and dissipate heat on the upper side between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. A third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged near the lower side of the heat radiation hole 264 group in the region 264A. On the back surface 144 of the back cover 22, a weld line is provided between the first resin pouring portion trace G11 and the third resin pouring portion trace G31, and between the second resin pouring portion trace G21 and the third resin pouring portion trace G31. WL1 and WL2 are generated.

The fourth resin pouring portion G4 and the fifth resin pouring portion G5 are arranged on the left and right in the heat radiation hole 264 group on the upper side of the third resin pouring portion G3, and the corresponding third and fourth resin pouring portions are provided. Weld line WL3 is generated between the traces G31 and G41, weld line WL4 is generated between the traces G31 and G51 of the third and fifth resin pouring portions, and further, the traces G41 and G51 of the fourth and fifth resin pouring portions are generated. Weld line WL5 is generated in the middle.

Next, the relationship between the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 will be considered. When molding the back cover 22, the first to third resin g1 to g3 are poured from the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 at substantially the same time to form the back cover 22, but the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 are formed. As shown in FIG. 105, the distance A between the line connecting the two and the third resin pouring portion G3 is shorter than half of the distance B between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2. ing.

Therefore, the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 are shown in FIG. As shown in 105, between the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 is The positional relationship is such that it enters and interrupts.

Further, there is a heat radiating region 264A having a large number of heat radiating holes 264 in the vicinity of the upper side of the third resin pouring portion G3, and the heat radiating holes 264 group hinders the flow of the third resin g3 to the upper side. It has a function of promoting the flow of the third resin g3 to the side between the pouring portions G1 and G2. As a result, the speed at which the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 flows downward in the direction indicated by g3a is such that the first and second resin g1 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G3 , G2 is faster than the speed at which g1a and g2a flow toward the center in the direction indicated by the arrows. good.

The heat radiation hole 264 group on the upper side of the third resin pouring portion G3 limits the flow of the third resin g3 to the upper side, so that the first and second resin pouring parts G1 on the opposite side of the heat radiation hole 264 group , G2 constitutes an acceleration unit that accelerates the flow velocity of the third resin g3 between the first and second resins g1 and g2.

At the time of injection molding of the back cover 22, when the first to third resin g1 to g3 are poured into the mold substantially at the same time from the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3, the first to third resin g1 to g3 become It sequentially flows to the outer peripheral side of the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 and fills the molding space.

At this time, the first and second resin g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 flow around the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 while diffusing around the entire circumference. , The flow velocity gradually slows down as the distance from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 increases.

On the other hand, in the third resin g3 that flows downward from the third resin pouring portion G3, the interval A is as short as half or less of the interval B between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. The first and second resins g1 precede the first and second resins g1 and g2 that flow from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 on both the left and right sides in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 105 to the center side. , G2 is approaching.

In particular, there is a heat radiating hole 264 group on the upper side of the third resin pouring portion G3, and since the heat radiating hole 264 group hinders the flow of the third resin g3 to the upper side, the heat radiating hole 264 group is moved to the lower side opposite to the heat radiating hole 264 group. The flow of the third resin g3 will be accelerated. Therefore, before the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 merge from both the left and right sides, the third resin g3 becomes the first and second resin g1, It enters between g2 and prevents the first and second resins g1 and g2 from merging.

In this way, the central third resin g3 joins the first resin g1 and the second resin g2 on both sides separately, so that the first weld is formed at the joining portion between the first resin g1 and the third resin g3. The second weld line WL2 is generated at the confluence of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3 in the line WL1.

However, in the vicinity of the first resin pouring portion trace G11, the second resin pouring portion trace G21, and the third resin pouring portion trace G31, the first resin g1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 from the first resin pouring portion G1 There is no trace of merging between the second resin g2 from the above and the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3.

Therefore, although the back cover 22 is molded by pouring the first to third resin g1 to g3 from the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 into the molding space of the mold substantially at the same time, the weld line Since the number of WL1 and WL2 generated is two and the weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated separately on both sides of the third resin g3, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the rigidity of the back cover 22.

The distance between the left and right first weld lines WL1 and the second weld line WL2 is closer to the lower side from the third resin pouring portion G3, but the merging angle between the first resin g1 and the third resin g3, the first If the merging angle between the two resin g2 and the third resin g3 becomes large, the first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 become invisible, and then disappear, but they do not intersect.

106 to 108 illustrate the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 108, the back cover 22 is provided with a large number of vertically elongated heat radiating holes 264 long in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 that protects the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, etc. that constitute the heat-generating back member from the back side, and a substrate that is bent from the outer periphery of the back surface portion 144 to the front side. It has a peripheral wall portion 145 that protects the cases 134, 136, and 138 from the outer peripheral side, and the back portion 144 is provided with a vertically long heat radiation hole 264 that is long in the vertical direction on the upper side and a viewing window 267 on the lower side. Has been done.

When the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 is divided into an upper portion 22U corresponding to the effect substrate case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136 and a lower portion 22D corresponding to the main substrate case 138, the heat dissipation hole is formed in the upper portion 22U thereof. 264 are intensively provided, the lower portion 22D has a certain amount of viewing windows 267, and the heat radiation hole 264 is not provided.

Therefore, the upper portion 22U of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 is the heat dissipation region 264A, and the lower portion 22D is the non-heat dissipation region 264B. The heat radiating hole 264 is formed in the shape of an elongated hole in the vertical direction.

The back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 has first to fifth resin pouring portion traces G11 to G51, and when the back cover 22 is molded, the first to first first resin pouring portion traces G11 to G51 corresponding to the first to fifth resin pouring portion traces G11 to G51 are formed. 5 The first to fifth resins g1 to g5 are poured into the molding space of the mold from the resin pouring portions G1 to G5 for molding.

The first resin pouring portion G1 is located between the heat radiating region 264A and the viewing window 267 on the bent portion 145a side of the back portion 144, and the second resin pouring portion G2 is located in the heat radiating hole 264 group on the bent portion 145b side of the back portion 144. It is provided in. The third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged closer to the second resin pouring portion G2 with respect to the viewing window 267 on the lower side of the intermediate position between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2.

The first weld line WL1 is located between the first resin pouring portion trace G11 and the third resin pouring portion trace G31, and the second weld line WL2 is located between the second resin pouring portion trace G21 and the third resin pouring portion trace G3. Are occurring respectively.

The fourth resin pouring portion G4 and the fifth resin pouring portion G5 are arranged on the left and right sides of the heat radiation hole 264 group on the upper side of the heat radiation region 264A, and are between the first and fourth resin pouring portion traces G11 and G41. The weld line WL3 is generated between the traces G21 and G51 of the second and fifth resin pouring portions, and the weld line WL5 is generated between the traces of the fourth and fifth resin pouring portions G41 and G51, respectively.

A plurality of heat radiation holes 264 are formed on the second resin pouring portion G2 side of the first resin pouring portion G1 and the first resin pouring portion G1 side of the second resin pouring portion G2, and the first and second resin pouring portions are formed. The first and second resin flow inhibiting portions C1 and C2 that inhibit the flow of the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from G1 and G2 to the other side are provided. In the first and second resin flow obstructing portions C1 and C2, with respect to the flow direction when the first and second resin g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 flow to the mating side. The heat dissipation holes 264 are arranged so as to cross.

A resin flow guide portion C3 is provided between the heat dissipation holes 264 between the first and second resin flow obstruction portions C1 and C2. In this resin flow guide portion C3, heat dissipation holes 264 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the heat dissipation holes 264 are arranged in the vertical direction with respect to the upward flow direction of the third resin g3 poured from the third resin pouring portion G3. It is in the direction. Therefore, the resin flow guide unit C3 is easier to flow the resin than the first and second resin flow inhibition units C1 and C2.

In such a configuration, when the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 to the first to third resin g1 to g3 are poured substantially at the same time when the back cover 22 is molded, the same as in the twelfth embodiment. The first weld line WL1 is generated at the confluence of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3, and the second weld line WL2 is generated at the confluence of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. It has the same effect as that of the embodiment.

That is, the first and second resins g1 and 2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 pass through a maze-like path between the heat radiation holes 264 of the first and second resin flow obstructing portions C1 and C2. While flowing toward the other side in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 108. On the other hand, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 rapidly flows in the forward direction in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 108 through the heat radiating holes 264 of the resin flow guide portion C3.

Therefore, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 enters and interrupts between the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing from both the left and right sides to the center side, as in the twelfth embodiment. A first weld line WL1 is generated at the confluence of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3, and a second weld line WL2 is generated at the confluence of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. It has the same effect as that of the embodiment.

FIGS. 109 to 112 illustrate the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145, and a heat radiating region 264A having a large number of heat radiating holes 264 is provided on the upper side of the back surface portion 144. A non-heat dissipation region 264B is provided on the lower side. The heat radiating holes 264 are formed in a long hole shape that is long in the vertical direction, and are arranged in a staggered manner in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

Ribs 375 protruding from the back surface portion 144 to the front side are provided on the back surface portion 144 in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the lower side of the heat radiating region 264A, and the first to first ribs 375 straddle the heat radiating region 264A and the non-radiating region 264B. 3 The traces G11 to G31 of the first to third resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portions G1 to G3 are formed.

The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged on the right side of the non-heat dissipation region 264B. The second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged in the heat radiating hole 264 group on the right side of the heat radiating region 264A corresponding to the upper part of the first resin pouring portion trace G11. The third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged near the upper side of the rib 375 on the left side of the intermediate position between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2.

On the upper side of the first resin pouring portion G1, a first resin flow inhibiting portion C1 that intersects with the flow of the first resin g1 and inhibits the upward flow of the first resin g1 is provided. Further, below the trace G2 of the second resin pouring portion, a second resin flow inhibiting portion C2 which is composed of a plurality of heat radiating holes 264 and inhibits the downward flow of the second resin g2 is provided.

In the vicinity of the lower side of the third resin pouring portion G3, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 is placed between the first and second resin g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. A resin flow guide unit C3 is provided to guide the resin flow guide in advance. The first resin flow inhibiting portion C1 and the resin flow guiding portion C3 are composed of ribs 375 on the back surface.

The base portion of the rib 375 with the back surface portion 144 has a larger cross-sectional area than the other portions. Therefore, the first resin g1 rising from the first resin pouring portion G1 enters the rib 375 as shown by the arrow g11 in FIG. 111 and is difficult to cross upward. Further, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 enters the rib 375 as shown by an arrow g31 in FIG. 111, and then is guided by the rib 375 and rapidly flows in the left-right direction.

On the upper side of the resin flow guide portion C3, a fourth resin flow obstruction portion C4 that inhibits the flow of the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 to the second resin pouring portion G2 is provided. The second and fourth resin flow obstructing portions C2 and C4 are composed of a plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 groups.

The first weld line WL1 is generated between the first resin pouring portion trace G11 and the third resin pouring portion trace G31, and the second weld line WL1 is generated between the second resin pouring portion trace G21 and the third resin pouring portion trace G31. Line WL2 is occurring.

The fourth and fifth resin pouring traces G41 and G51 are arranged on the left and right sides of the heat dissipation hole 264 group on the upper side of the heat dissipation region 264A. The third weld line WL3 is located between the traces of the third and fourth resin pouring portions G31 and G41, and the fourth weld line WL4 is located between the traces of the second and fifth resin pouring portions G21 and G51. The fifth weld line WL5 is generated between the traces G41 and G51, respectively.

Also in this case, if the first to third resins g1 to g3 from the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 are poured substantially at the same time when the back cover 22 is molded, the first is the same as in the twelfth embodiment. The first weld line WL1 is generated at the confluence of the 1 resin g1 and the third resin g3, and the second weld line WL2 is generated at the confluence of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. It has the same effect.

The first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 are the resistances of the first and second resin flow inhibiting portions C1 and C2 as shown by arrows in FIG. 112. While receiving, it flows from both the upper and lower sides to the center side.

On the other hand, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 flows to the right as shown by an arrow in FIG. 112 and interrupts between the first and second resin g1 and g2. In particular, there is a resin flow guide portion C3 under the third resin pouring portion G3, and the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 rapidly flows through the resin flow guide portion C3 to flow first and second. Since it interrupts between the resins g1 and g2, the third resin g3 can be surely entered above the first resin g1 prior to the rise of the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1.

As a result, the first weld line WL1 is generated at the confluence of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3 as described above, and the second weld line WL2 is generated at the confluence of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. It occurs and has the same effect as described above.

113 and 114 illustrate an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, the back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145, and the back surface portion 144 has vertical ribs 376 and horizontal ribs 377 protruding forward in the vertical and horizontal directions. A plurality of them are provided vertically and horizontally at predetermined intervals. The central portion of the back surface portion 144 is a heat dissipation region 264A, and the peripheral side of the heat dissipation region 264A is a non-heat dissipation region 264B. The heat radiating region 264A is provided with a long hole-shaped heat radiating hole 264 that is long in the left-right direction. The back surface portion 144 is provided with ribs 375 protruding forward from the back surface portion 144 in the left-right direction between the heat dissipation region 264A and the non-heat dissipation region 264B.

On the back surface portion 144, traces G11, G21, G31, G41, and G51 of the first to fifth resin pouring portions are formed. The traces G11 to G51 of the first to fifth resin pouring portions correspond to the first to fifth resin pouring portions G1 to G5. The first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 are arranged on both the left and right sides in the vicinity of the upper side of the lateral ribs 377a arranged on the lower side of the back surface portion 144. The third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged above the middle between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 and in the vicinity of the central vertical rib 376a.

In the vicinity of the third resin pouring portion G3, the third resin g3 formed in the vertical direction by the central vertical rib 376a and poured from the third resin pouring portion G3 is provided with the first and second resin pouring portions G1. A resin flow guide portion C3 for guiding between the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from G2 is provided.

Between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2, a plurality of heat radiating holes 264 are provided in the vertical direction between the central vertical rib 376a and the vertical ribs 376 on both the left and right sides. Then, the resin flow guides of the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 by the vertical ribs 376a on both the left and right sides and the plurality of heat radiating holes 264 on the left and right sides thereof. The first and second resin flow inhibiting portions C1 and C2 that inhibit the flow to the C3 side are configured.

The first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 are located in the vicinity of the lateral ribs 377a on the lower side thereof, and the lateral ribs 377a guide the flow of the first and second resin g1 and g2 to the central side. However, the distance from the third resin pouring portion G3 to the intersection of the horizontal rib 377a and the vertical rib 376a is from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 to the intersection of the horizontal rib 377a and the vertical rib 376a. It is shorter than the distance, and the third resin g3 flows ahead of the first and second resins g1 and g2.

The back surface portion 144 may be provided with one first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at the four corners thereof, and one third resin pouring portion G3 may be arranged on the central side thereof. Therefore, in that case, the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 are arranged on each side of the back surface portion 144, and the third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged on the central side thereof.

Even in such a configuration, when molding the back cover 22, the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 flow through the first and second resins. While it flows from both the left and right sides to the center side while receiving the resistance of the obstructing portions C1 and C2, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 interrupts between the first and second resin g1 and g2. It will be.

Therefore, as in the twelfth embodiment, the first weld line WL1 is at the confluence of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3, and the second weld line is at the confluence of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. WL2 is generated respectively and has the same effect as described above.

The first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 become invisible if the merging angle when the first to third resins g1 to g3 merge becomes larger than a predetermined angle.

In each of the twelfth to fifteenth embodiments, the back cover 22 is illustrated as a game part, but the back cover 22 is not limited to the protective cover such as the back cover 22, and various game parts can be similarly implemented. Further, the resin flow guide portion can be formed of a thick portion formed in the resin flow direction, a rib formed in the resin flow direction, or the like on a part of the back cover 22, and the resin flow obstruction portion is a back cover. It can be composed of an opening such as a heat radiation hole 264 formed in a part of the 22; a thin portion intersecting the resin flow direction in a part of the back cover 22, a rib intersecting the resin flow direction, and the like.

FIGS. 115 to 119 illustrate the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 115, the back cover 22 has a flat plate-shaped back surface portion 144 and a back surface portion 144 that protect the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, etc., which constitute the heat-generating back member, from the back side. It has a peripheral wall portion 145 that bends from the outer peripheral side to the front side to protect the substrate cases 134, 136 and the like from the outer peripheral side. The peripheral wall portion 145 is provided with a bent portion 145a having a long protrusion amount to the front side and a bent portion 145b having a short bending portion 145b on the left and right sides.

The back surface portion 144 has a heat dissipation area 264A on the upper side and a non-heat dissipation area 264B on the lower side of the heat dissipation area 264A. In the heat radiating region 264A, a large number of round hole-shaped heat radiating holes 264d are arranged vertically and horizontally, and a large number of heat radiating holes 264U and a large number of long vertical heat radiating holes (openings) 264 are arranged in the horizontal direction. And are provided. The heat radiating hole group 264D includes two rows (plurality of rows) of heat radiating hole rows 264E in which a large number of heat radiating holes 264 are arranged in the left-right direction.

The back cover 22 is an example of a game component, and the heat radiating hole 264 is an example of an opening. However, the game component may be something other than the back cover 22, and the opening may be something other than the heat radiating hole 264. ..

On the back surface portion 144, first and second resin pouring portions traces G11 and G21 are formed in or around the heat dissipation region 264A, such as on both sides of the heat radiation hole group 264D on the left and right and in the vertical direction diagonally. A resin flow guide portion C3 is provided in the left-right direction along the heat dissipation region 264A in the vicinity of the non-heat dissipation region 264B on the heat dissipation region 264A side.

The first and second resin pouring portions G11 and G21 are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 in which the resin is poured into the molding space of the mold when the back cover 22 is molded, and the back cover 22. Is molded by pouring resin from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at substantially the same time.

The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged on the upper side of the non-heat dissipation region 264B in the vicinity of the lower side of the heat dissipation hole group 264D and corresponding to the left end side thereof. The second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged between the heat radiating hole group 264U and the heat radiating hole group 264D corresponding to the right end side of the heat radiating region 264A.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the resin flow guide portion C3 is composed of reinforcing ribs 375 that integrally project from the back surface portion 144 to the front side, and the molten resin passes through the base portion of the rib 375 and moves to the right. The cross-sectional area is large so that it can easily flow.

In the heat radiating hole group 264D with a large number of heat radiating holes 264, when the periphery of the two or three heat radiating holes 264 in the substantially central portion between the left and right first and second resin pouring traces G11 and G21 is seen, it is shown in FIG. 119. As described above, the first to third confluence portions R1 to R3 where the first and second resin g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 merge are formed. Then, in the first to third merging portions R1 to R3, the merging positions of the first and second resins g1 and g2 are displaced in the resin flow direction, and the first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are generated. ing.

In the first merging portion R1 between the upper and lower heat radiating holes 264a and 264b, the first and second resin g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 merge from both the left and right sides, so that the first and second resins are merged. 2 The difference in shape and / or structure between the resin pouring portions G1 and G2 to the merging position, that is, the first weld line at a position corresponding to the resin flow conditions such as the resin flow resistance of the first and second resins g1 and g2. WL1 is generated in the vertical direction.

Further, in the second merging portion R2 between the left and right heat radiating holes 264b and 264c, the first and second resin g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 merge from both the upper and lower sides. The second weld is located at a position corresponding to the resin flow conditions such as the resin flow resistance of the first and second resins g1 and g2, that is, the difference in shape and / or structure between the second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 to the confluence position. Line WL2 is generated in the left-right direction.

Further, in the third confluence portion R3 between the lower heat radiation hole 264c and the resin flow guide portion C3, the first and second resin g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 are from both the left and right sides. Due to the merging, the difference in shape and / or structure between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 to the merging position, that is, the resin flow conditions such as the resin flow resistance of the first and second resins g1 and g2. The third weld line WL3 is generated at the corresponding position. In particular, the lower side of the third weld line WL3 is inclined downward to the right under the influence of the resin flow guide portion C3 located near the lower side of the first and second resin pouring portions G1.

This is due to the following reasons. That is, when the first and second resin g1 and g2 are poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2, the first and second resin g1 and g2 flow resistance of the mold from the left and right sides to the center side. It flows while resisting the above and merges at the first to third merging portions R1 to R3 between the radiating holes 264a to 264c. The merging positions of the first and second resins g1 and g2 in the first to third merging portions R1 to R3 are the merging positions of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 to the first to third merging portions R1 to R3. It is determined by the flow conditions such as the flow velocity ratio of the first and second resins g1 and g2 to the position.

Between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 and each confluence position of the first to third confluence portions R1 to R3, the number, orientation, interval, path length, etc. of the heat dissipation holes 264 in the middle thereof, etc. The shape and / or structure is different, and the resin flow conditions from the first resin pouring portion G1 to the first to third merging portions R1 to R3 are different accordingly, and the second resin pouring portion G2 to the first Since the resin flow conditions up to the third confluence parts R1 to R3 are different, the first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are connected to the first to third confluence parts R1 to R3 due to the difference in the resin flow conditions. Occurs with deviation.

In particular, since the resin flow guide portion C3 is located near the lower side of the third confluence portion R3, the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 flows to the right through the resin flow guide portion C3 and its periphery. do. On the other hand, the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 flows to the left through the resin flow guide portion C3 and its periphery.

In this case, the first resin pouring portion G1 is near the resin flow guide portion C3, and the second resin pouring portion G2 is located at a position farther from the resin flow guide portion C3 than the first resin pouring portion G1. The first resin g1 from the resin pouring portion G1 flows acceleratingly to the right through the resin flow guide portion C3 at a flow rate faster than that of the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 (first resin g1). Flow velocity> Flow velocity of the second resin g2).

As a result, the third weld line WL3 generated at the third confluence portion R3 moves to the right under the influence of the flow velocity of the first resin g1, which causes the third weld line WL3 to move to another weld line. Since it can be displaced in the resin flow direction more than WL1 and WL2, the strength of the back cover 22 is improved.

That is, the first to first resin g1 formed by merging the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 around the heat radiating holes 264b and 264c. There are 3 weld lines WL1 to WL3. The first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are displaced in the resin flow direction because of the shape and / or structure of the first resin pouring portion trace G11 to the first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3, respectively. This is because the shapes and / or structures of the second resin pouring portion trace G21 to the first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are different from each other.

120 to 123 exemplify the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, the back cover 22 has a flat plate-shaped back surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145 that bends from the outer periphery of the back surface portion 144 to the front side. The peripheral wall portion 145 integrates bent portions 145a and 145b that bend from both left and right sides to the front side, an upper bent portion 145c that bends from the upper side to the front side, and an upright portion 145d that stands upward from the front end of the upper bent portion 145c. Be prepared for. The upper end of the back surface portion 144 is lowered from one end side to the other end side in the left-right direction, and an upper bending portion 145c that bends from the upper end side to the front side is provided. The upper bent portion 145c may have substantially the same front-rear width in the left-right direction, or may have different front-rear widths on the left and right.

A heat dissipation hole group 264D having a large number of heat dissipation holes 264 is provided on the back surface portion 144 and the upper bending portion 145c. On the upper end side of the back surface portion 144, traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are formed on both the left and right sides.

The first and second resin pouring portions G11 and G21 are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 in which the resin is poured into the molding space of the mold when the back cover 22 is molded, and the back cover 22. Is molded by pouring resin from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at substantially the same time.

The first and second resin g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at the time of molding the back cover 22 pass through the heat radiation holes 264 and pass through the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. It flows while diffusing substantially concentrically around the center, and merges and fills the entire molding space of the mold. The resins g1 and g2 are guided by the upright portion 145d and flow in the left-right direction while increasing the flow velocity.

For example, when looking around the two upper and lower heat dissipation holes 264a and 264b located between the left and right first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2, they are poured from the left and right first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. The first and second resins g1 and g2 are the second merging portion R1 between the upper and lower heat radiating holes 264a and 264b and the upper bending portion 145c side between the upper radiating hole 264a and the standing portion 145d. The sections R2 merge according to different resin flow conditions, and the first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated at the merge positions of the first and second merge sections R1 and R2 according to the resin flow conditions.

Since the first merging portion R1 has substantially the same resin flow conditions such as the path length of the flow path from the left and right first and second resin pouring sections G1 and G2 to the merging position and the peripheral conditions of the flow path. The first and second resins g1 and g2 from both the left and right sides merge at a substantially central confluence position between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2, and the first weld line WL1 generated by the confluence It can be formed in the vertical direction between the upper and lower heat radiation holes 264a and 264b.

On the other hand, on the second merging portion R2 side, the first and second resin g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 are between the heat radiating holes 264a and the heat radiating holes 264c and 264d on both sides thereof, and others. The merging position is inclined toward the second resin pouring portion G2 side as it approaches the upright portion 145d, and the second weld line WL2 is generated at the merging position.

That is, when observing the merging state of the first and second resins g1 and g2 on the second merging portion R2 side, in the vicinity of the upper heat radiating hole 264a, the heat radiating holes 264a and the heat radiating holes 264c and 264d on both sides thereof are Since the first and second resins g1 and g2 that have passed through the interval flow and merge under substantially the same conditions, they merge at a position slightly deviated to the second resin pouring portion G2 side according to the flow conditions.

However, the upper bent portion 145c has an upright portion 145d on the tip end side, and a portion having a large cross-sectional area on the base portion side functions as a resin flow guide portion C3. Immediately after the first and second resins g1 and g2 are flown to the resin flow guide section C3, they are guided by the resin flow guide section C3 and flow in the left-right direction while increasing the flow velocity.

Comparing the distance from the first resin pouring portion G1 to the resin flow guide portion C3 and the distance from the second resin pouring portion G2 to the resin flow guide portion C3, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the upper bending portion The front-rear dimension L3 of the 145c is substantially the same, but the vertical dimension L1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 to the upper bending portion 145c is the vertical dimension from the second resin pouring portion G2 to the upper bending portion 145c. It is smaller than L2.

Therefore, of the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at substantially the same time, the first resin g1 goes to the resin flow guide portion C3 before the second resin g2. Upon reaching it, it rapidly flows to the second merging portion R2 side while being guided by the resin flow guide portion C3, and the flow velocity of the first and second resins g1 and g2 in the resin flow guide portion C3 is increased. The flow velocity of the first resin g1> the flow velocity of the second resin g2.

As a result, the merging positions of the first and second resins g1 and g2 merging from both the left and right sides on the second merging portion R2 side of the upper bending portion 145c flow in the resin flow guide portion C3 to the second merging portion R2 side. It will be affected by the first resin g1 and will tilt toward the second resin pouring portion G2 as it approaches the upright portion 145d side, and the second weld line WL2 will be generated correspondingly.

Therefore, if there are first and second merging portions R1 and R2 with the upper heat radiation hole 264a interposed therebetween, the first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated in the first and second merging portions R1 and R2. The position of the second weld line WL2 is determined by the difference in the flow velocity of the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing to the first and second confluences R1 and R2 via the resin flow guide portion C3 and other flow conditions. Similar to the above, the resin flow guide portion C3 can be displaced in the resin flow direction with respect to the first weld line WL1.

124 and 125 illustrate the 21st embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, the back cover 22 has a flat plate-shaped back surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145 that bends from the outer periphery of the back surface portion 144 to the front side. The back surface portion 144 has a protruding portion 144X protruding downward. The back surface portion 144 has a heat radiating region 264A, and the heat radiating region 264A is provided with a large number of elongated heat radiating holes 264 long in the vertical direction. The heat radiating hole rows 264E are formed by the plurality of heat radiating holes 264, and a plurality of the heat radiating hole rows 264E are provided in the vertical direction.

On the back surface portion 144, there are traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions. The first and second resin pouring portions G11 and G21 are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 in which the resin is poured into the molding space of the mold when the back cover 22 is molded, and the back cover 22. Is molded by pouring the first and second resins g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at substantially the same time.

The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged at the lower left portion of the back surface portion 144, and the second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged at the upper right portion of the back surface portion 144, respectively. The peripheral wall portion 145 from the lower side to the right side of the back surface portion 144 constitutes a resin flow guide portion C3 that guides the first and second resin g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2.

The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged near the resin flow guide portion C3, and the second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged at a position farther from the resin flow guide portion C3 than the first resin pouring portion G1. At the time of molding the back cover 22, the first and second resin g1 and g2 were poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 for molding, but the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 were poured. In the first and second resins g1 and g2, the first resin g1 reaches the resin flow guide portion C3 before the second resin g2. Therefore, in the lower resin flow guide portion C3, the first resin g1 flows to the right and the second resin g2 flows to the left, respectively, but the first resin g1 flows to the right at a speed faster than that of the second resin g2. Moving.

When looking at the peripheral side of the two upper and lower heat dissipation holes 264a and 264b located in the middle between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2, as shown in FIG. 124, the heat dissipation holes 264a of the middle heat dissipation hole row 264E The first merging portion R1 is provided between the heat radiating hole 264E and the heat radiating hole 264b of the lower heat radiating hole row 264E, and the second merging portion R2 is provided between the heat radiating hole 264b of the lower heat radiating hole row 264E and the resin flow guide portion C3. The first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated in the first and second confluences R1 and R2, respectively.

In the lower resin flow guide unit C3, the second weld line WL2 has a difference in the flow velocities of the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing in the resin flow guide unit C3 (the difference in the flow velocities of the first resin g1). (Flow velocity> the flow velocity of the second resin g2), the resin flow guide portion C3 can be displaced with respect to the first weld line WL1 in the resin flow direction.

126-128 exemplify the 22nd embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145 that bends from the outer peripheral side to the front side of the back surface portion 144. The peripheral wall portion 145 has a first peripheral wall portion 145a that bends greatly to the front side and a second peripheral wall portion 145b that bends slightly to the front side on the left and right. The rear end side from the back surface portion 144 to the first peripheral wall portion 145a is a heat dissipation region 264A, and in the heat dissipation region 264A, a vertically elongated heat radiation hole 2641 is provided on the back surface portion 144 side, and the first peripheral wall portion 145a. A long hole-shaped heat radiation hole 2642 in the left-right direction is provided on the rear end side. A bent portion 145e that bends a plurality of times is provided in the vertical direction on the rear end side of the first peripheral wall portion 145a, and the bent portion 145e constitutes a resin flow guide portion C3.

The traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are provided on one side portion of the back surface portion 144 near the first peripheral wall portion 145a. The traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at the time of molding, and the first resin pouring portion G1 is located at the lower left of the back surface portion 144 and is the second. The resin pouring portion G2 is arranged at the upper left portion of the back surface portion 144, respectively. The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged near the resin flow guide portion C3, and the second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged at a position far from the resin flow guide portion C3.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 128, in the peripheral portion between the heat radiating hole 2641 on the left end side of the back surface portion 144 and the heat radiating hole 2642 on the rear end side of the first peripheral wall portion 145a, a first position is provided between the heat radiating holes 264, 1642. The merging portion R1 has a second merging portion R2 on the resin flow guide portion C3 side of the heat radiation hole 2642, and the first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated in the first and second merging portions R1 and R2. There is.

The first weld line WL1 is formed in the left-right direction between the heat radiation holes 264, 1642. Similar to the above, the second weld line WL2 has a resin flow guide portion C3 with respect to the first weld line WL1 due to the difference in the flow velocities of the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing in the resin flow guide portion C3. It is deviated in the resin flow direction. This is because the first resin pouring portion G1 is closer to the resin flow guide portion C3 than the second resin pouring portion G2, and the flow velocities of the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing in the resin flow guide portion C3 Due to the difference (flow velocity of the first resin g1> flow velocity of the second resin g2), the second weld line WL2 can be displaced with respect to the first weld line WL1 in the resin flow direction of the resin flow guide portion C3.

129 and 130 exemplify the 23rd embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the back cover 22 includes a back surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145, and the peripheral wall portion 145 includes a first bent wall 1451 that bends from the upper end side to the front side of the back surface portion 144. It has a second bent wall 1452 that bends upward from the front end of the first bent wall 1451. The back surface portion 144 is provided with elongated heat radiation holes 264 in the left-right direction in the vertical and horizontal directions. The back surface portion 144 has a first resin pouring portion trace G1 corresponding to the first resin pouring portion G1 on the upper left portion, and corresponds to the second resin pouring portion G2 on the right side below the first resin pouring portion G1. There is a trace G21 of the second resin pouring portion.

On the upper part of the back cover 22, a first resin flow guide portion C3-1 composed of a bent portion 1453 of a back surface portion 144 and a first bent wall 1451, and a first bent wall 1451 and a second bent wall 1452 are provided. A second resin flow guide portion C3-2 composed of the bent portion 1454 is provided in the left-right direction. The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged near the first and second resin flow guide portions C3-1 and C3-2, and the second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged near the first and second resin flow guide portions C3-1 and C3. It is located far away from -2.

As shown in FIG. 129, a first confluence portion R1 is provided between the heat radiation holes 264a and 264b in the peripheral portion of the heat radiation holes 264a and 264b on the upper side of the back surface portion 144, and the heat radiation holes 264a and the first resin flow guide portion C3. There is a second merging section R2 between -1 and a third merging section R3 between the first resin flow guide section C3-1 and the second resin flow guide section C3-2, the first to third of which. The first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are generated at the merging portions R1 to R3.

The second weld line WL2 is the first with respect to the first weld line WL1 due to the difference in the flow velocities of the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing in the first resin flow guide portion C3-1 as described above. The resin flow guide unit C3-1 can be displaced in the resin flow direction. Further, the third weld line WL3 is different from the second weld line WL2 due to the difference in the flow velocities of the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing in the second resin flow guide portion C3-2 as described above. 2 The resin flow guide unit C3-2 can be displaced in the resin flow direction.

FIG. 131 illustrates a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 131, the back cover 22 includes a back surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145, ribs 379 and 380 are provided vertically and horizontally on the back surface portion 144, and heat dissipation between the ribs 379 and 380 of the back surface portion 144 is provided. A plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 are provided in the region 264A. The back surface portion 144 has a first resin pouring portion trace G11 corresponding to the first resin pouring portion G1 at four corners, and a second resin pouring portion trace G21 corresponding to the second resin pouring portion G2 at the center portion thereof. ..

For example, in relation to the first resin pouring portion G1 on the lower left, the lateral rib 380a in the vicinity of the first resin pouring portion G1 constitutes the resin flow guide portion C3. On the other hand, the second resin pouring portion G2 is connected to the resin flow guide portion C3 via a vertical rib 379a in the vicinity thereof.

As shown in FIG. 131, there is a first confluence R1 between the upper and lower heat radiating holes 264a and 264b in the peripheral portion of the heat radiating holes 264a and 264b on the lower side of the back surface portion 144, and the lower heat radiating holes 264b and the resin are provided. There is a second merging portion R2 with the flow guide portion C3. Then, the first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated at the first and second confluence portions R1 and R2.

The second weld line WL2 has a first resin g1 that flows to the right in the first resin flow guide portion C3 and a second resin g2 that flows to the left in the first resin flow guide portion C3, as described above. Due to the difference in the flow velocity between the above and the first weld line WL1, the resin flow guide portion C3 can be displaced in the resin flow direction.

In the 16th to 21st embodiments, the first and second resin g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1, G2 and the like reach the first and second confluence portions R1 and R2. The resin flow conditions up to are as follows: It is determined in relation to the size of the route length.

132 to 135 exemplify the 25th embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 that protects the internal effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, etc. from the back side, and the back surface portion 144 from the outer periphery to the front side. It has an outer peripheral wall 145 that bends to the surface.

The back surface 144 has a heat dissipation area 264A corresponding to the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, etc., and a non-heat dissipation area 264B corresponding to the main board case 138, and the heat dissipation area 264A has heat dissipation holes in the left-right direction. A plurality of rows 264D are provided above and below. In each heat radiation hole row 264D, a plurality of heat radiation holes 264 having long vertical holes are arranged in the left-right direction. Further, the non-heat dissipation region 264B is configured to have no holes.

The effect board case 134 houses the effect board 133, the liquid crystal board case 136 houses the liquid crystal board 135, and the main board case 138 houses the main board 137, and the respective boards 133, 135, and 137 contain integrated circuit devices and others. Electronic components are installed. On the back side of the main board case 138, a board information display means 391 composed of a sticking sheet or the like is provided.

As shown in FIG. 134, the board information display means 391 is provided with a two-dimensional code 393 indicating the control number of the main board 137 and a number display unit 394, and an opening / closing history notation for indicating the opening / closing history of the main board case 138. A section 395 is provided. The opening / closing history notation unit 395 is provided up and down in three sets, with the opening person notation column and the opening date notation column as one set.

The back surface portion 144 is provided with a visual recognition unit 396 in the non-heat dissipation region 264B corresponding to the substrate information display means 391. Through the visual recognition unit 396, a two-dimensional code 393, a number display unit 394, and an opening / closing history notation unit 395 It is possible to visually recognize predetermined information such as. The visual recognition unit 396 constitutes a specific portion in which the weld line WL generated during molding of the back cover 22 should be avoided.

In this embodiment, the back cover 22 constitutes a resin game component (protective cover), and the main board case 138 arranged to face the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 constitutes the opposing component. A visual recognition unit 396 constituting a specific portion is provided on the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 corresponding to the substrate information display means 391 on the main substrate case 138 side. The board information display means 391 on the main board case 138 side may be used as a specific part.

Further, the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 form a back member, and the effect board 133 and the liquid crystal board 135 inside the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 135 are provided with heat-generating electronic components and the like, and form a heat-generating member or a heat-generating back member.

The back surface portion 144 has first and second resin pouring portion traces G11 and G21 on the lower side thereof, and one or more resin pouring portion traces (not shown) on the upper side. The first resin pouring portion trace G11 corresponds to the first resin pouring portion G1 at the lower part of the heat dissipation region 264A, and the second resin pouring portion trace G21 corresponds to the second resin pouring portion G2 at the corner of the non-heat dissipation region 264B. There is.

The back surface portion 144 is provided with a resin flow guide portion C3 in the left-right direction along the lower side of the heat radiating region 264A in the non-heat radiating region 264B near the lower side of the heat radiating region 264A. The resin flow guide portion C3 has a large cross-sectional area as compared with other portions, and is composed of ribs 397 protruding from the back surface portion 144 to the front side, so that the flow resistance is small and the molten resin easily flows. There is. The back cover 22 extends upward, and a resin pouring portion or the like is also provided in the heat radiating region 264A of the upper portion thereof.

The first resin pouring portion G1 is located in the lowermost heat radiating hole row 264D of the heat radiating region 264A, a large number of heat radiating holes 264 are arranged in the vicinity of the upper side thereof, and the resin flow guide portion C3 is close to the lower side. It is arranged. The second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged at a position far downward from the resin flow guide portion C3.

The first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 are arranged on both sides of the visual recognition portion 396, which is a specific portion. On the upper side of the first resin pouring portion G1, a flow inhibiting portion 398 that inhibits the flow of the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 to the upper side is provided. The flow blocking portion 398 is composed of a large number of heat dissipation holes 264.

When molding the back cover 22, the first and second resin g1 and g2 are poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at substantially the same time for molding. At this time, since there is a flow obstruction portion 398 composed of a large number of heat dissipation holes 264 above the periphery of the first resin pouring portion G1, as shown in FIG. 135, the flow obstruction portion 398 is the first resin pouring portion G1. Inhibits the upward flow of the first resin g1 from the above. As a result, the flow rate of the first resin g1 flowing downward from the first resin pouring portion G1 increases relatively.

Then, if the flow rate of the first resin g1 to the lower side increases, the first resin g1 flows to the second resin pouring portion G2 side via the resin flow guide portion C3, so that the second resin pouring portion G2 The flow velocity of the first resin g1 to the side becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 that flows from the second resin pouring portion G2 and flows concentrically to the first resin pouring portion G1 side.

In particular, since there is a flow blocking portion 398 on the upper side of the first resin pouring portion G1 and a resin flow guide portion C3 on the lower side of the first resin pouring portion G1, it flows downward by the heat radiating hole 264 on the heat radiating region 264A side. The first resin g1 is easily flowed into the resin flow guide portion C3, and diffuses up and down while rapidly flowing to the right along the resin flow guide portion C3.

Therefore, although the first and second resin g1 and g2 are poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at substantially the same pressure, the flow velocity of the first resin g1 flowing to the right is the flow velocity of the second resin pouring. It becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 which flows to the left side while diffusing all around the part G2. Then, due to the difference in the flow velocity (flow velocity of the first resin g1> flow velocity of the second resin g2), the merging position between the first resin g1 and the second resin g2 is between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. It will move significantly from the center to the second resin pouring portion G2 side, and a weld line WL will be generated at the confluence position.

Therefore, there is a relatively large substrate information display means 391 on the main substrate case 138 side corresponding to the intermediate portion between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2, and corresponding to the substrate information display means 391. Even if there is a visible portion 396 on the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, the weld line WL can be generated at a position deviated from the visible portion 396 toward the second resin pouring portion G2 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the weld line WL from overlapping with the visible portion 396.

136 to 138 illustrate the 26th embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 that protects the internal effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, etc. from the back side, and the back surface portion 144 from the outer periphery to the front side. It has an outer peripheral wall 145 that bends to the surface. The outer peripheral wall 145 has a first outer peripheral wall 145a that bends greatly from one side in the left-right direction to the front side, and a second outer peripheral wall 145b that bends slightly from the other side in the left-right direction to the front side.

The back surface portion 144 is provided with a heat dissipation region 264A on the upper side and a non-heat dissipation region 264B on the lower side thereof. The heat radiating region 264A extends from the rear end side of the first outer peripheral wall 145a to the rear end side of the second outer peripheral wall 145b, and on the back surface 144 side, a row of heat radiating holes by vertically long elongated hole-shaped heat radiating holes 400. A large number of 401 are provided on the upper and lower sides, and on the rear end side of the first outer peripheral wall 145a and the second outer peripheral wall 145b, heat radiation hole rows 404 and 405 with long left and right elongated hole-shaped heat radiation holes 402 and 403 are vertically arranged in a row. It is provided in a shape.

The non-heat dissipation area 264B corresponds to the back side of the main board case 138 that houses the main board 137, and the non-heat dissipation area 264B includes the viewing window 406, the first resin pouring portion trace G11, and the second resin pouring portion trace G21. And are provided. The viewing window 406 has a rectangular opening and is arranged in the upper left corner of the non-heat dissipation region 264B corresponding to the board information display means 391 on the back surface of the main board case 138.

The traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G11 and G21 are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at the time of molding. The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged in the upper left portion of the non-heat dissipation region 264B between the upper heat dissipation hole row 401, the left heat dissipation hole row 404, and the viewing window 406. The heat dissipation hole row 401 on the upper side, the heat dissipation hole row 404 on the left side, and the viewing window 406 on the lower side constitute flow blocking portions 407 to 409 with respect to the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1.

The heat dissipation hole row 401 on the upper side and the viewing window 406 on the lower side function as flow blocking parts 407 and 409 that prevent the first resin g1 poured from the first resin pouring part G1 from flowing to the upper side and the lower side. do.

On the right side of the first resin pouring portion G1 (on the second resin pouring portion G2 side), there is a narrow passage (specific part) 410 between the heat dissipation hole row 401 and the viewing window 406, and the narrow passage 410 guides the resin flow. Part C3 is configured.

Further, on the left side of the first resin pouring portion G1 (the side opposite to the second resin pouring portion G2), there is a flow blocking portion 408. Therefore, most of the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 flows to the right side through the resin flow guide portion C3.

The upper heat radiating hole row 401, the left heat radiating hole row 404, and the lower viewing window 406 limit the flow of the first resin g1 to the upper side, the left side, and the lower side, and as a result, the first resin g1 is used. It also functions as a resin guiding unit 407 to 409 that guides to the right side.

On the other hand, the second resin pouring portion G2 is located on the right side of the viewing window 406, and is arranged at a position far downward from the resin flow guide portion C3.

Also in this case, there are flow-inhibiting portions 407 to 409 in the vicinity of the first resin pouring portion G1, and the upper and lower sides of the first resin g1 flowing from the first resin pouring portion G1 by the flow-inhibiting portions 407 to 409. As shown in FIG. 138, the flow rate of the first resin g1 flowing to the right side through the narrow passage 410 increases in order to prevent the flow to the left side.

Therefore, at the time of molding the back cover 22, the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 flow to the right side even though the first and second resin g1 and g2 are poured at substantially the same pressure at substantially the same pressure. The flow velocity of the resin g1 becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 that flows to the left while diffusing all around the second resin pouring portion G2.

Then, due to this difference in flow velocity (flow velocity of the first resin g1> flow velocity of the second resin g2), the confluence position of the first resin g1 and the second resin g2 is changed between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2. It will move significantly from the narrow passage 410 in the middle to the second resin pouring portion G2 side, and the weld line WL will be generated at the confluence position. As a result, the occurrence of weld line WL in the narrow passage 410 can be prevented, and the mechanical strength of the back cover 22 can be improved.

139 to 141 illustrate the 27th embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the back cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 that protects the internal effect board case 134, the main board case 138, and the like from the back side, and an outer peripheral wall that bends from the outer periphery of the back surface portion 144 to the front side. It has 145 and. The back surface portion 144 has a heat dissipation area 264A on the upper side, and a non-heat dissipation area 264B on the lower side thereof. The heat radiating region 264A is provided with elongated heat radiating holes 264 in the left-right direction in the vertical and horizontal directions.

The effect board case 134 houses the effect board 133, and the main board case 138 houses the main board 137. An electronic component 412 such as an integrated circuit device is mounted on the effect board 133, and an information display means 413 such as a two-dimensional code for displaying management information is provided on the electronic component 412.

As shown in FIG. 141, the effect board case 134 is provided with a large number of heat radiating holes 414, but the portion corresponding to the information display means 413 is provided with a visual recognition portion 415 without the heat radiating holes 414. The main board case 138 is provided with board information display means 391.

The non-heat dissipation region 264B is provided with a non-perforated viewing unit 417 corresponding to each information display means 413 and an opening-shaped viewing window 418 corresponding to the substrate information display means 391. The visual recognition unit 417 constitutes a specific portion. The viewing window 418 is rectangular and has a tapered sloping opening edge 418a.

The back surface portion 144 is provided with a first resin pouring portion trace G11 in the vicinity of the upper side of the viewing window 418, and a second resin pouring portion G21 between the heat radiating holes 264 in the heat radiating region 264A. The traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G11 and G21 are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at the time of molding. The traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are arranged vertically separated from each other.

Near the lower side of the first resin pouring portion G1, there is a flow blocking portion 419 by the viewing window 418, and the flow blocking portion 419 allows the flow from the first resin pouring portion G1 to the lower side of the first resin g1. Because of the inhibition, the first resin g1 flows intensively in the upper half, and the flow velocity to the upper side becomes faster. On the other hand, the second resin pouring portion G2 is located between the heat radiating holes 264 of the heat radiating region 264A, and a large number of surrounding heat radiating holes 264 obstruct the flow of the second resin g2 to the periphery, so that the second resin pouring portion G2 is moved to the lower side of the second resin g2. The flow velocity of is slowed down.

Therefore, when the first and second resin g1 and g2 are poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2, the flow velocity of the first resin g1 flowing upward from the first resin pouring portion G1 is the second resin. It becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 flowing downward from the pouring portion G2, and due to the difference in the flow velocity (the flow velocity of the first resin g1> the flow velocity of the second resin g2), the first resin g1 and the second resin The merging position with g2 will move significantly from the center of the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 to the heat radiating hole 264 side at the lower part of the heat radiating region 264A, and the weld line WL will move to the merging position. appear.

Further, the weld line WL is located in the heat dissipation region 264A provided with a large number of heat dissipation holes 264, but the first and second resins g1 and g2 are formed by merging from both the upper and lower sides, and the heat is dissipated in the shape of long holes long on the left and right. Since the direction is along the hole 264, it is possible to prevent an extreme decrease in the strength of the back cover 22.

142 and 143 illustrate the 28th embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the back cover 22 includes a back surface portion 144 and an outer peripheral wall 145 on the outer peripheral side thereof.

A plurality of vertical ribs 420 and horizontal ribs 421 are provided vertically and horizontally on the front side of the back portion 144, and a plurality of vertical ribs 420 and horizontal ribs 421 are provided in the heat radiating region 264A on the left and right center sides of the back portion 144. The heat dissipation hole 264 is provided. Further, on the back surface side of the back surface portion 144, the first resin pouring portion trace G11 corresponding to the first resin pouring portion G1 is located on the center side, and the second resin pouring portion trace G21 corresponding to the second resin pouring portion G2 is provided at the four corners. Are provided respectively. Further, on the back surface side of the back surface portion 144, an instruction rib 422 that serves as a mark of a sticking type display means 423 such as a display label is provided on the side opposite to the heat dissipation hole 264 with respect to the first resin pouring portion G1.

For example, when looking at the relationship between the first resin pouring portion G1 on the center side and the second resin pouring portion G2 on the upper right side, there are vertical ribs 420, horizontal ribs 421, etc. around the second resin pouring portion G2. There is no heat radiation hole 264, and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 diffuses substantially evenly over the entire circumference thereof.

On the other hand, around the first resin pouring portion G1, there are a large number of heat dissipation holes 264 on substantially three sides of the upper side, the left side, and the lower side, so that the first resin g1 can be diffused from the first resin pouring portion G1 to three sides. Since the flow inhibiting portions 424 to 426 that inhibit the flow are formed, the flow rate of the first resin g1 to the right side increases.

Further, while the vertical rib 420a is located near the right side of the first resin pouring portion G1, the vertical rib 420a is connected to the horizontal rib 421a near the lower side of the flow blocking portion 424, and further near the horizontal rib 421a. Since the upper side portion 422a of the indicator rib 422 is located in, the vertical rib 420a, the horizontal rib 421a, and the upper side portion 422a of the indicator rib 422 guide the resin flow with respect to the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1. It constitutes a part C3.

Therefore, the first resin g1 poured from the first resin pouring portion G1 at the time of molding the back cover 22 is affected by the inhibitory action of the flow inhibiting portions 424 to 426 and flows in a large amount to the resin flow guiding portion C3 side. It rapidly flows to the second resin pouring portion G2 side through the resin flow guide portion C3.

Also in this case, the flow velocity of the first resin g1 flowing to the right becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 flowing to the left while diffusing all around, and the difference in the flow velocity (of the first resin g1). (Flow velocity> Flow velocity of the second resin g2), the confluence position of the first resin g1 and the second resin g2 is moved from the center of the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 to the second resin pouring portion G2 side. Weld line WL is generated at the confluence position.

Therefore, when there is a heat radiating hole 264 near the middle between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2, if a large weld line WL is formed in the vicinity of the heat radiating hole 264, the mechanical strength of the back cover 22 is increased. However, by moving the weld line WL to a position deviated from the vicinity portion (specific portion) of the heat radiation hole 264 in this way, the strength of the back cover 22 can be easily secured.

The same applies to the relationship between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 on the lower right side.

Although each embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to each embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Although the pachinko machine is illustrated in the embodiment, it can be similarly implemented in a game machine 1 such as a ball game machine and an arrange ball machine in addition to the pachinko machine.

A plurality of back members arranged on the back surface side of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3 and a back cover 22 for protecting at least one of the back members of the plurality of back members are provided, and the back cover 22 is provided within a predetermined angle. In the game machine 1 that can be opened and closed and is further detachable, the back cover 22 is provided with regulatory means 149,294,295 for restricting the removal of the back cover 22 when the opening angle of the back cover 22 is less than a predetermined angle. It may be removable after the regulation is lifted by means 149.

In that case, the hinge means 21 that supports the back cover 22 so as to be openable / detachable may be provided, and the regulating means 149, 294, 295 may be arranged in the vicinity of the hinge means 21 and / or provided in the hinge means 21. Further, on the upper side of the back cover 22, a ball tank 48 for storing the game balls and a guide rail 49 for guiding the game balls from the ball tank 48 to the payout means 23 are provided, and the regulating means 149 includes the ball tank 48 and the ball tank 48. / Or it may be composed of a guide rail 49.

A plurality of back members arranged on the back surface side of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3 and a back cover 22 for protecting at least one of the back members of the plurality of back members are provided, and the back cover 22 is a hinge shaft made of resin. In the game machine 1 having 147 and capable of opening and closing the back cover 22 by inserting the hinge shaft 147 into the hinge bearings 148 on the game machine main bodies 2 and 3, the hinge shaft 147 is in the radial direction of the hinge shaft 147. It may be provided with a recess 167 that is recessed into the recess.

In that case, the recess 167 may be elongated in the axial direction of the hinge shaft 147. The hinge shaft 147 may have a substantially U-shaped cross section in the direction crossing the recess 167. Further, the hinge shaft 147 has an oval shape, an elliptical shape, or the like having a major axis portion 147A and a minor axis portion 147B, and when the hinge shaft 147 is inserted into the hinge bearing 148 and rotated from the first angle to the second angle, At the first angle, at least one of the major axis portions 147A may not abut on the inner wall of the hinge bearing 148, and at the second angle, the major axis portion 147A may abut on the inner wall of the hinge bearing 148.

The hinge shaft 147 has a cantilever shape integrated with the back cover 22 on one end side in the axial direction of the hinge shaft 147, and on the other end side of the hinge shaft 147, an insertion head (insertion end portion) for closing the recess 167 is provided. ) 166 may be provided. The hinge shaft 147 may have a double-sided shape integrated with the back cover 22 on both ends in the axial direction of the hinge shaft 147.

In the gaming machine 1 provided with the first resin member that the player can contact and the second resin member that the player cannot contact, the number of traces of the resin pouring portion at the time of molding the first resin member is N1 (N1 ≧). 1) The number may be N1 + n1 (n1 ≧ 1), and the number of traces of the resin pouring portion at the time of molding the second resin member may be N1 + n1 (n1 ≧ 1).

In that case, the first resin member is a cover body in the operating means that can be operated by the player, and the second resin member is a back cover 22 that protects the back members arranged on the back surface side of the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3. It may be. The back cover 22 includes a body portion 68 provided with a flow-inhibiting portion of the molten resin and an operation top portion continuously formed on the upper end side of the body portion 68, and is provided on the side of the body portion 68 without the flow-inhibiting portion. The trace of the resin pouring portion may be arranged. Further, the flow blocking portion may be a pair of notched portions 68a that are arranged so as to face each other in the radial direction of the body portion 68 and are recessed from the end edge of the body portion 68 toward the operation top side.

As a specific example of the first resin member that the player can contact, the cover body of the operating means has been mentioned, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower cover 62 that covers the outer peripheral sides of the upper plate 52 and the lower plate 61, the resin portion in the movable effect means 97, and the like may correspond to the first resin member.

However, it is not appropriate from the viewpoint of cost effectiveness to use all the resin parts that the player can contact as the first resin member. Therefore, among the resin portions that the gaming machine can contact, the number of resin pouring portions may be N1 or N1 + n1 or more. For example, (i) a resin part such as a handle or an operating means that may be violently touched (pulled or struck), and (ii) an upper plate or a lower plate may be touched in the process of playing. The resin part (assumed to come into contact), (iii) the resin part that is not expected to come into contact with the movable effect means provided on the gaming machine frame, but interferes with the game if it is intentionally destroyed, (iv). Considering "contact possibility" and "influence in case of destruction" such as other resin parts, N1 is not the case if it is judged that the possibility or influence is large. For those judged to be, N1 + n1 or more may be used.

To exemplify the combination, only the above (i) is N1, the above (i) and (ii) are N1, and the above (i), (ii) and (iii) are N1. It is conceivable that i) and (iii) are set to N1, and only the above (iii) is set to N1.

It is also possible to consider the possibility of damage from another perspective. That is, the possibility of damage to the gaming machine is not only due to contact by the player, but also due to the movement of the clerk. Of course, it is not intentionally destroyed or damaged, but it may be accidentally damaged at various timings such as assembly, installation, maintenance during business hours or outside business hours.

Therefore, based on the magnitude of the possibility of damage due to the negligence of the clerk, the one with a high possibility may be regarded as the first resin member. For example, when considering the magnitude of damage on the premise of "falling over of the gaming machine" at the time of installation, the damage to the back side of the gaming machine is invisible to the player, so there is no effect on the function and it is just an aesthetic appearance. There is no particular problem as long as it is damaged to the extent that it is damaged (scratches, etc.).

However, if the front side of the gaming machine is damaged, it does not give a good impression to the player even if the function is not affected at all. Therefore, when the pachinko / pachislot machine falls to the front side, higher strength is required for the part that first touches the ground (for example, the upper plate unit, the handle, etc.) due to the unevenness. The resin portion at such a portion may be used as the first resin member.

Not limited to this, if "contact when the door is opened" at the time of maintenance is assumed, the part that may first contact the adjacent table (for example, the left end or the right end, or the amount of protrusion) A large portion or the like) may correspond to the first resin member.

When the protective cover that protects the heat-generating back member is provided with a plurality of heat-dissipating holes that are formed in a long vertical hole shape and that dissipate heat from the heat-generating back member to the outside, the heat-dissipating holes are the plates of the protective cover. The structure has a first outer spread portion and a second outer spread portion formed in an outward spread shape opposite to the plate thickness direction from the middle boundary portion in the thickness direction, and the boundary portion is the plate thickness of the protective cover. It can be anywhere in the middle of the direction.

Further, although a production board case or the like for accommodating the production board is illustrated as the heat-generating back member, a heat-generating electronic component or the like may be used as long as it is provided on the back side of the gaming machine. The protective cover that protects the heat-generating back member is a back cover when the heat-generating back member is a production board case or the like, but may be something other than the back cover depending on the heat-generating back member to be protected.

The diameter of the heat-dissipating hole is larger on the side opposite to the heat-generating back member than the diameter on the heat-generating back member side, but depending on the shape of the heat-dissipating hole, it is opposite to the diameter on the heat-generating back member side. It is also possible that the diameter on the side is small. When the diameter of the heat-dissipating hole opposite to the heat-generating back member is larger than the diameter of the heat-generating back member, it is desirable that all the circumferential directions of the heat-dissipating hole be large. However, the diameter of the heat radiating hole on the opposite side to the heat-generating back member may be substantially larger than the diameter on the heat-generating back member side, and even if only a small part in the circumferential direction has the same diameter or a smaller diameter, the entire diameter is sufficient. It suffices if the diameter is substantially large.

In a gaming machine equipped with a front door that is pivotally supported on the gaming machine frame via a hinge means and a locking means that locks the front door to the gaming machine frame in a closed state, the front door is locked by the locking means. When a front door stopping means for stopping the front door at a stop position near the front side of the gaming machine frame when released is provided, the front door stopping means sets the front door of the gaming machine frame when the front door is unlocked. Any structure or the like may be used as long as it has a function of stopping at a stop position near the front side.

Generally, if a front door stopping means for receiving the front door from below by a receiving member provided at the bottom of the gaming machine frame is adopted, there is an advantage that the structure can be simplified, but the gaming machine frame It is also possible to employ an engaging means that engages the front door at a stop position near the front side of the vehicle to stop the front door. The half-open position of the front door is appropriate for the stop position of the front door, but even if the stop position and half-open position are opened to the front door or that position, the player in front of it, the staff of the game hall, etc. Any position may be used as long as the contact is not a problem.

It is provided with a trace of a first resin pouring portion corresponding to a first resin pouring portion, a trace of a second resin pouring portion corresponding to a second resin pouring portion, and a trace of a third resin pouring portion corresponding to a third resin pouring portion. When molding by merging resin game parts such as the back cover and the resin poured into the molding space from each resin pouring part, the first resin pouring part trace, the second resin pouring part trace, and the third resin pouring part The traces are arranged so that the resin poured from the third resin pouring portion interrupts between the resin poured from the first resin pouring portion and the resin poured from the second resin pouring portion. The resin pouring portion may satisfy the condition from the position where it should be arranged, or the resin pouring portion may satisfy the condition depending on the magnitude of the flow resistance of the resin from each resin pouring portion. The flow resistance in the direction in which the resins from the first and second resin pouring portions merge may be increased, and the flow resistance in the direction in which the resins from the third resin pouring portion merge may be reduced.

As a resin game part having an opening, a back cover having a large number of heat dissipation holes is illustrated, but if the opening is formed, a protective cover other than the back cover and other parts may be used. good. Further, the opening may be singular or plural. For example, the game component may have first and second confluences on both sides of one opening.

Further, in the case of a heat radiating hole or the like having a relatively small opening, at least the first merging portion where the resin from the first resin pouring portion and the resin from the second resin pouring portion merge around the heat radiating hole or the like. However, if the size of the opening becomes large or the shape of the opening becomes complicated, the first to third confluences may be formed around the opening. .. In that case, it can be implemented in the same way.

When molding a game part by merging in a molding space poured from a plurality of resin pouring portions, when the merging position is set to a position away from a specific part, the resin poured from the first and second resin pouring portions is used. However, depending on the shape, structure, etc. of the game parts, the merging of the resins from the first to third resin pouring portions from the three directions may become a problem.

Further, even when the relationship between the merging of the resin from the two resin pouring parts of the first and second resin pouring parts and the specific part becomes a problem, the first and second resin pouring parts are arranged with the specific part sandwiched between them. In addition, the first and second resin pouring portions may be arranged on the same side with respect to the specific portion.

On the back side of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3, a resin first substrate case 138 accommodating a main substrate 137 for controlling the game operation and a resin second substrate case 134 accommodating a substrate different from the main substrate 137. The number of the resin pouring portion traces 192 at the time of molding the first substrate case 138 is N2 (N2 ≧ 1), and the number of the resin pouring portion traces 207 at the time of molding the second substrate case 134 is set to N2 (N2 ≧ 1). The number may be N2 + n2 (n2 ≧ 0).

In that case, it is desirable that the rear wall portion (back surface portion) 180a of the first substrate case 138 protrudes to the back side of the rear wall portion (back surface portion) 201a of the second substrate case 134. A resin back cover 22 that protects at least the first substrate case 138 and the second substrate case 134 is provided, and the region of the back cover 22 that overlaps with the first substrate case 138 is set as the first region, and the second substrate case of the back cover 22 is provided. When the region overlapping with 134 is the second region, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in the first region is N3 (N3 ≧ 1), and the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in the second region is N3 + n3 (n3 ≧ 1). ) May be individual.

A resin back cover 22 that protects the second substrate case 134 and does not protect the first substrate case 138 is provided, and the number of resin pouring portion traces 192 of the first substrate case 138 is N4 (N4 ≧ 1). The number of resin pouring portion traces 280 at the time of molding the cover 22 may be N4 + n4 (n4 ≧ 1).

In the gaming machine 1 provided with a plurality of resin parts including at least the first resin part, the first extruded portion traces 281a and 281b at the time of molding arranged at the first position in the first resin part and the first in the first resin part. The second extruded portion traces 281a and 281b at the time of molding, which are arranged at the two positions, may be configured to have different sizes from each other.

In that case, the first resin component is a resin back cover 22 that protects the back member, and the surface area of the back cover 22 is other than the heat dissipation area 264A in which a plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 are arranged and the heat dissipation area 264A. When divided into the non-heat dissipation region 264B, the number of the extruded portion traces 281a and 281b in the non-heat dissipation region 264B is N5 (N5 ≧ 1), and the number of the extruded portion traces 281a and 281b in the heat dissipation region 264A is N5 + n5 (n5 ≧ 1). 1) It may be an individual piece. Further, the back cover 22 includes a back surface portion 144 that protects the back member from the back side, and bent portions 145a and 145b that bend from the outer circumference of the back surface portion 144 to the front side. The size may be different from that of the bent portions 145a and 145b.

In the gaming machine 1 provided with the resin back cover 22 that protects the back member, the surface region of the back cover 22 is set from the first region having a large volume and the first region with reference to the substantially central portion in the left-right direction. When divided into a second region having a small volume, the number of resin pouring traces 280 during molding in the second region is N6 (N6 ≧ 1), and the number of resin pouring traces 280 during molding in the first region is set to N6 (N6 ≧ 1). The number may be N6 + n6 (n6 ≧ 1).

In that case, the back cover 22 includes a back surface portion 144 that covers the back member from the back side, and bent portions 145a and 145b that bend from the outer circumference of the back surface portion 144 to the front side, and the resin pouring portion trace 280 is arranged on the back surface portion 144. You may. When the back cover 22 is provided with bent portions 145a or 145b on both the left and right sides of the back portion 144, the bent portion 145a or 145b in the first region has a larger bending length than the bent portions 145b or 145a in the second region. It may be. Further, the back cover 22 has a hinge means 21 for attaching one of the bent portions 145a and 145b of the first region and the second region to the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the other of the first region and the second region. A stopper (latch means) 24 for fixing the bent portions 145a and 145b to the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 in the closed state of the back cover 22 may be provided.

A first member 137 and a resin-made second member 138 that protects the first member 137 so that a specific portion of the first member 137 can be visually recognized, and the second member 138 corresponds to a corresponding area corresponding to the first member 137. In the gaming machine 1 provided with the through hole 183, the specific portion on the first member 137 side may be arranged at a position that does not overlap with the through hole 183 of the second member 138 and the weld lines 192a and 192b. The first member is a substrate 137 on which electronic components are mounted, the second member is a substrate case 138 for accommodating the substrate 137, and the substrate case 138 has a plurality of heat dissipation holes 183 which are through holes. It may be. The first member is a substrate case 138 for accommodating a substrate 137 on which electronic components are mounted, the second member is a back cover 22 for protecting the substrate case 138, and the back cover 22 is a plurality of through holes. It may have a heat radiating hole 264. The specific portion may be an information display unit on the substrate side.

In the gaming machine 1 provided with a back member including a board case 138 for accommodating the board 137 and a resin back cover 22 for visually protecting the back member side, the back cover 22 is a specific portion on the board case 138 side. The trace of the resin molding portion provided at the time of resin molding of the back cover 22 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap with the back cover 22.

In that case, the substrate may be the main substrate 137 for controlling the game operation, and the substrate case may be the first substrate case 138 for accommodating the main substrate 137. The back cover 22 may be arranged at a position where it overlaps with the first substrate case 138 and the trace of the resin molded portion does not overlap with the first substrate case 138. The back cover 22 does not overlap with the first substrate case 138, and may protect the back members other than the first substrate case 138. The traces of the resin molding portion are the traces of the resin pouring portion 192,280 at the time of molding, or the traces of the extruded portion 281a and 281b at the time of molding.

A gaming machine 1 provided with a back member including a first board case 138 for accommodating a main board 137 and a resin back cover 22 for visually covering the back member, and a board management information display unit 178 is provided on the main board 137. In the back cover 22, the back cover 22 may be provided at a position where the trace of the resin molding portion provided at the time of molding the back cover 22 does not overlap with the substrate management information display portion 178.

In that case, the back cover 22 may overlap with the first substrate case 138, and the resin molded portion trace may be arranged at a position not overlapping with the substrate management information display portion 178. The back cover 22 may be provided with a visual opening for the substrate management information display unit 178. The first substrate case 138 may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap with the back cover 22, and the back cover 22 may cover a back member other than the first substrate case 138. The traces of the resin molding portion are the traces of the resin pouring portion 192, 280 and / or the traces of the extruded portions 281a and 281b.

Movable means 46, 47, 97 capable of executing a plurality of operations, and attention information display means 122, 123, 124 for directly or indirectly displaying the attention information of the movements of the movable means 46, 47, 97. In the provided gaming machine 1, the attention-calling information display means 122, 123, 124 does not display the movements having a low degree of attention-calling to the player among the plurality of movements, and the movements having a high degree of warning to the player. Attention information may be displayed.

In that case, the alert information may be related to a movement in which the amount of movement of the movable means is large among the plurality of movements. The alert information display means 122, 123, 124 may be a sticker-type display sticker. The movable means 46, 47, 97 are located on the front surface of the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 so that the player can contact them, and the alert information display means 122, 123, 124 are located in the vicinity of the movable means 46, 47, 97. You may do so.

When molding the resin parts, it is necessary to use an appropriate resin material according to the conditions required for each part. Resin parts with excellent heat resistance are used for resin parts that require heat resistance, resin materials with excellent transparency are used for resin parts that require transparency, and resin parts that require impact resistance are resistant to impact. Use resin materials with excellent impact resistance. On the contrary, for resin parts having relatively low heat resistance and impact resistance, an excellent resin material corresponding to the heat resistance is used. For example, ABS is suitable for the back cover 22, and PC is suitable for the substrate cases 134, 136, 138, 141, 143.

Depending on the peripheral conditions, such as when there is a peripheral member in the vicinity of the back cover 22, it is desirable that at least a part of the back cover 22 has a shape along the peripheral member. For example, the front end edge of the bent portion of the back cover 22 is processed into a concave-convex shape in the front-rear direction along the peripheral member on the front side thereof. When the ball tank 48, the guide rail 49, etc. are close to the upper side of the bent portion of the back cover 22, the upper side wall of the bent portion may be inclined in the vertical direction along the bottom surface of the ball tank 48, the guide rail 49. It is processed into an uneven shape.

The number of the third hinge means 21 may be two or more in the vertical direction, but the plurality of third hinge means 21 may be of the same type or different types. The hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 may have a perfect circular shape, an oval shape, or a shape close thereto. The regulatory means 149 can be modified in various ways as long as its function is not impaired.

When the hinge shaft 147 is provided with a concave portion, it is desirable to arrange the concave portion in a place that is hard to see, such as arranging the concave portion so as to be located on the front side of the hinge shaft 147 when the back cover 22 is in the closed state. Further, if the back cover 22 is in a non-detachable or difficult state, the concave portion cannot be visually recognized, and if the back cover 22 is opened to a predetermined angle and becomes removable, the concave portion can be visually recognized. good.

When the inner rail of the guide rail 27 is molded by injection molding, when the length of the inner rail is long, or when a part of other parts is integrally provided on the inner rail, a plurality of inner rails in the longitudinal direction are used. Although a resin pouring portion is provided at a location, it is desirable that the number of resin pouring portions on the inner rail is one from the viewpoint of preventing the occurrence of weld lines.

When the back cover 22 is provided with heat radiating holes, the shape and number of the heat radiating holes are not a problem as long as the heat radiating holes are suitable for the amount of heat radiated, but in general, they are often formed in a long hole shape. In this case, it is desirable that the harness arranged inside the back cover 22 is not caught in the heat radiating hole, and a part of the harness does not protrude rearward from the heat radiating hole.

For example, if there is a harness that is largely curved to the back cover 22 with a small radius near the inside of the heat radiation hole, and the curved portion of the harness is close to or in contact with the back cover 22, the curved portion of the harness is in the left-right direction. In the case of, the heat radiation holes are arranged in the vertical direction with respect to the left and right directions, and when the curved portion of the harness is in the vertical direction, the heat radiation holes are arranged in the horizontal direction with respect to the vertical direction. It is desirable to configure it so that it intersects with the direction of the curved portion of.

When the back cover 22 is divided into an arrangement area and a non-arrangement area of the heat dissipation holes, it is desirable that the resin pouring portion is provided in or near the non-arrangement area. When the back cover 22 is divided into an arrangement area and a non-arrangement area of the heat dissipation holes, it is desirable that the number of the extruded portions is larger in the arrangement area. When the back cover 22 is divided into an upper part and a lower part, the number of the extruded parts on the upper side is arranged in the central part more than the peripheral part, and the number of the extruded parts on the lower side is arranged in the peripheral part more than the central part. ..

The distance between the uppermost third hinge means 21 and the lowermost third hinge means 21 of the back cover 22 is such that the uppermost latch means 24 and the lowermost latch means 24 for fixing the back cover 22 to the inner frame 3 side. The distance to is different. For example, the distance of the former is larger or smaller than the distance of the latter.

A gaming machine provided with a protective cover that protects the heat-generating back member, and the protective cover is formed in a long hole shape that is long in the vertical direction and has a plurality of heat-dissipating holes that dissipate heat from the heat-generating back member to the outside. It is desirable that the heat radiating hole has a first outer spreading portion and a second outer spreading portion formed in an outward expanding shape in the opposite direction in the plate thickness direction from the intermediate boundary portion in the plate thickness direction of the protective cover.

In that case, it is desirable that the first outer spreading portion and the second outer spreading portion have a tapered shape with a small diameter on the boundary portion side, and the inner peripheral surface of the first outer spreading portion located on the heat-generating back member side of the protective cover. The angle between the and the inner surface of the protective cover on the heat-generating back member side is the inner peripheral surface of the second outer spreading portion located on the opposite side of the protective cover from the heat-generating back member and the outer surface opposite to the heat-generating back member. It is desirable that it is larger than the angle between the two. Further, the heat-generating back member is a board case that houses a control board, and the protective cover may be a back cover that protects the board case from the back side.

A protective cover is provided to protect the heat-generating back member, and the protective cover is a gaming machine having a plurality of heat-dissipating holes that dissipate heat from the heat-generating back member to the outside. However, it is desirable that the diameter on the side opposite to the heat-generating back member is large.

The protective cover is arranged in the vertical direction, and heat dissipation holes may be formed in the protective cover in the front-rear direction. The heat-generating back member includes a main board that controls the game operation and a sub-board that controls the effect operation other than the game operation, and the number of heat dissipation holes or the amount of openings of the protective cover is arranged in the vicinity of the main board. The number or opening amount of heat radiating holes arranged in the vicinity of the sub-board may be larger than the number or opening amount of heat radiating holes.

It includes a main board case that houses the main board and a sub-board case that houses the sub-board and is placed above the main board case, and the protective cover has a heat dissipation hole on the upper side near the sub-board case. It may be a thing. The heat radiating hole has a first outer spreading portion and a second outer spreading portion formed in an outward expanding shape in the opposite direction in the plate thickness direction from the intermediate boundary portion in the plate thickness direction of the protective cover, and is a heat-generating back member. The diameter of the second outer spreading portion on the opposite side to the heat-generating back member may be larger than the diameter of the first outer spreading portion on the side.

In a gaming machine equipped with a front door that is pivotally supported on the gaming machine frame via a hinge means and a locking means that locks the front door to the gaming machine frame in a closed state, the front door is locked by the locking means. It is desirable to provide a front door stopping means for stopping the front door at a stop position near the front side of the gaming machine frame when the front door is released.

It is desirable that the front door stopping means is provided at the lower part of the gaming machine frame and includes a receiving member that receives the front door from below. Further, it is desirable that the receiving member receives the end portion of the front door opposite to the hinge means from the lower side. The stop position may be a half-open position of the front door.

The center of gravity of the front door is located in front of the line segment connecting the hinge means and the locking means, and at the stop position, the upper end of the end opposite to the hinge means of the front door is separated from the gaming machine frame to the front side. In addition, the lower side may exhibit a forward leaning posture in which the lower side is located on the rear side of the upper side. A forward force acts on the upper side and a backward force acts on the lower side of the front door. When closing the front door toward the game machine frame side, it is desirable to provide a lifting means for receiving the front door and lifting it onto the member as the front door rotates around the hinge means.

A game machine provided with a resin-made game part, which has a plurality of resin-pouring portion traces when the resins poured from a plurality of resin-pouring portions are merged and molded, corresponds to the first resin pouring portion. It is provided with a trace of the first resin pouring portion, a trace of the second resin pouring portion corresponding to the second resin pouring portion, and a trace of the third resin pouring portion corresponding to the third resin pouring portion. The traces of the 2 resin pouring portion and the trace of the 3rd resin pouring portion were poured from the 3rd resin pouring portion between the resin poured from the 1st resin pouring portion and the resin poured from the 2nd resin pouring portion. The resin is arranged so as to cut in.

The game component is a protective cover that protects the heat-generating back member from the back side. It may have a trace of a second resin pouring portion and a trace of a third resin pouring portion.

Between the traces of the first resin pouring portion and the traces of the second resin pouring portion, the resin from the third resin pouring portion is preceded by the resin from the first resin pouring portion and the resin from the second resin pouring portion. It may be provided with a resin flow guide unit for guiding.

A resin flow inhibiting portion that inhibits the flow of the resin from each resin pouring portion to the mating side may be provided on the opposite side of the first resin pouring portion and the second resin pouring portion. The resin flow guide portion may be composed of a plate-shaped portion formed in the resin flow direction between the heat radiation holes, a thick portion formed in the resin flow direction, or a rib formed substantially parallel to the resin flow direction. .. The resin flow-inhibiting portion may be composed of an opening, a thin-walled portion, or a rib formed so as to intersect the resin flow direction.

A resin game component having a plurality of openings formed therein is provided, and the game component includes at least a first resin pouring portion and a second resin pouring portion corresponding to at least a first resin pouring portion and a second resin pouring portion during molding. In a game machine having a trace of a resin pouring portion, at least a first confluence portion and a second confluence portion where the resin from the first resin pouring portion and the resin from the second resin pouring portion merge are formed around the opening. There, the resin flow condition from each resin pouring portion to the confluence position of the first confluence portion and the resin flow condition from each resin pouring portion to the confluence position of the second confluence portion are different.

The flow velocity ratio between the flow velocity on the first resin pouring portion side and the flow velocity on the second resin pouring portion side when the resins from the resin pouring portions merge at the first confluence portion, and from each resin pouring portion. The flow velocity ratio between the flow velocity on the first resin pouring portion side and the flow velocity on the second resin pouring portion side when the resins of the above are merged at the second confluence portion may be different.

The game component is a protective cover that protects the heat-generating back member from the back side, and the protective cover has a heat radiating region in which a plurality of heat radiating holes are arranged and the first confluence portion arranged in or around the heat radiating region. And the one provided with the second confluence portion. A resin flow guide portion that is arranged near the heat radiation region or the outside of the heat radiation region and guides the resin from the resin pouring portion in the merging direction is provided, and the resin is provided from the first resin pouring portion via the resin flow guide portion. The resin fluidity until reaching the confluence position may be different from the resin fluidity until reaching the resin confluence position from the second resin pouring portion through the resin flow guide portion.

The distance from the first resin pouring portion to the resin flow guide portion may be shorter than the distance from the second resin pouring portion to the resin flow guide portion. The resin flow guide portion may be a rib protruding forward from the heat dissipation region. The resin flow guide portion may be a bent portion that bends from the outside to the front side of the heat dissipation region.

A game machine including a resin-made game part, the game part having a plurality of resin-pouring portion traces when molded with resin poured from a plurality of resin-pouring portions, and the resin-pouring portion trace is the game. There are at least traces of the first resin pouring portion and traces of the second resin pouring portion arranged on different sides around the specific portion on the component side or the specific portion on the opposite component side facing the game component, and the first resin pouring portion is described. A position where the resin from the first resin pouring portion and the resin from the second resin pouring portion are separated from the specific portion toward one of the resin pouring portions in the portion trace or the peripheral portion of the second resin pouring portion trace. It is desirable to provide a resin guiding portion for guiding the resin from the first resin pouring portion or the resin from the second resin pouring portion so as to merge at.

The resin guiding portion inhibits the flow of the resin poured from the first resin pouring portion to the side other than the specific portion, and causes the flow velocity of the resin from the first resin pouring portion to the specific portion side. It may be a flow-inhibiting portion in which the flow velocity of the resin from the second resin pouring portion to the specific portion side is faster than the flow velocity.

The resin guiding portion guides the flow of the resin poured from the first resin pouring portion to the specific portion side, and causes the flow velocity of the resin from the first resin pouring portion to the specific portion side. (2) It may be a flow guide portion in which the flow velocity of the resin from the resin pouring portion to the specific portion side is faster than the flow velocity.

The game component is a protective cover that protects the back member including the heat generating member from the back side, and the protective cover includes a heat radiating region in which a plurality of heat radiating holes are arranged, the specific portion on the back member side, or the protective cover. It may have the trace of the first resin pouring portion and the trace of the second resin pouring portion arranged on both sides of the specific portion on the side.

The flow-inhibiting portion may be composed of an opening. It is desirable that the flow guide portion has a large cross-sectional area. The resin guiding portion may be provided with a limiting portion that limits the flow of the resin to one side or both sides of the resin guiding portion.

<Background technology and issues 1>
As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144506, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a game board in the main body of the game machine, and a liquid crystal display means constituting the image display means is provided in the central portion of the game area of the game board. , Game parts such as prize-winning means and movable production means are arranged around the area. On the back side of the game board, an effect board case accommodating an effect board for various effect control and a liquid crystal substrate case accommodating a liquid crystal substrate for controlling a liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right, and game control is performed below the effect board case. A main board case for accommodating the main board for use is arranged.

On the front side of the game machine main body, the upper plate unit on the lower side of the game board is provided with an operation means including an operation button, and if the operation button is operated when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game, the liquid crystal display means is designated. The operation effect image of is displayed. On the back side of the game machine main body, payout means are arranged in the vertical direction on one side in the left-right direction, and a ball tank for storing game balls and a game ball in the ball tank are guided to the payout means on the upper side. The guide rails are arranged in the left-right direction.

In addition, on the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, payout means are arranged in the vertical direction on one side in the left-right direction, and a ball tank for storing game balls and a ball tank in the ball tank are guided to the payout means on the upper side. The guide rails are arranged in the left-right direction. On the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a power supply board case for accommodating a power supply board for power supply and a payout board case for accommodating a payout board for payout control of game balls are arranged in front and behind under the main board case. Has been done. Further, on the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a back cover that protects the entire effect board case and the liquid crystal board case and the upper side of the main board case from the back side is provided so as to be removable and openable via hinge means.

In this type of gaming machine, the back cover can be opened and closed around the hinge means for convenience when inspecting the production board case, LCD board case, main board case, and other back member sides, but it is necessary. The entire back cover is removed according to the situation. However, in recent years, the back members of gaming machines have to be arranged so as to protrude greatly to the back side due to the expansion of the game board, the liquid crystal display means, etc. on the front side thereof, and the arrangement of the movable effect means. be. Therefore, when the back member, which can be said to be three-dimensional, is protected by the back cover, it cannot be said that simply protecting the back member from the back side in a plane is sufficient, and it is necessary to protect the side surface side of the back member as well.

When removing the back cover under such a situation, it is indispensable to avoid interference with the back member in the back cover. After opening the back cover at a predetermined angle around the hinge means, the hinge shaft of the hinge means It is necessary to remove the back cover by pulling it upward. Therefore, in the back cover under such a situation, it is desired to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing interference with the back member when the back cover is attached or detached.

<Background technology and issues 2>
Further, in this type of gaming machine, when the gaming machine main body and the back cover are both made of resin, the hinge shaft constituting the hinge means and the hinge shaft are rotatable around the hinge shaft and supported in the vertical direction. Among the hinge bearings, it is conceivable that the hinge shaft is integrally injection-molded on the back cover which is an opening / closing member, and the hinge bearing is integrally injection-molded on the game machine main body which is a support member.

When the hinge shaft is integrally molded with the back cover in this way, in order to secure sufficient strength of the hinge shaft, it is necessary to make the diameter of the hinge shaft larger than the plate thickness on the back cover side. However, if the hinge shaft has a straight cylindrical solid structure and its diameter is larger than the plate thickness on the back cover side, the volume of the molten resin in the solid part of the hinge shaft is larger than the volume of the other parts. Because it is large, the cooling rate of the molten resin in the central part on the hinge shaft side is slower than in other parts, and molding strain (shrinkage strain) called sink marks occurs on the hinge shaft after cooling, causing deformation and backing. It may interfere with the opening and closing of the cover.

If the diameter of the hinge shaft is set to the same level as the plate thickness on the back cover side, the problem of molding distortion (shrinkage strain) when the molten resin is cooled can be solved, but the strength of the hinge shaft itself is reduced and the back cover is opened and closed. Has an unbearable problem.

In addition, when the hinge shaft is inserted into the hinge bearing, the frictional resistance between the hinge shaft and the hinge bearing is small and the back cover can be opened and closed easily as long as the back cover cannot be removed. When opened, the frictional resistance between the hinge shaft and the hinge bearing increases, and the back cover can be removed, but the hinge shaft does not accidentally come out of the hinge bearing when the back cover is not intended to be removed. It is conceivable to do so.

In such a case, it is necessary to make the cross-sectional shape of the hinge shaft substantially elliptical. However, when the cross-sectional shape of the hinge shaft is made substantially elliptical, the wear of the hinge shaft and / or the hinge bearing is minimized, and the hinge shaft can be inserted and removed from the hinge bearing while ensuring a predetermined frictional resistance. To facilitate it, the hinge shaft needs to be elastically deformable in the major axis direction.

Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a configuration, it is desired to be able to prevent the occurrence of molding distortion while ensuring the strength of the hinge shaft.

<Background technology and issues 3>
Many resin members molded by injection molding, such as operation buttons and back covers, are arranged on the gaming machine. On the other hand, in the molding of the resin member, the size of the number of resin pouring portions into which the molten resin is poured into the cavity in the mold greatly affects the aesthetic appearance, strength, and molding efficiency of the resin member after molding. That is, if the number of resin pouring portions of the mold is reduced, the weld line and the traces of the resin pouring portion are reduced, so that the appearance and strength of the resin member after molding are improved, but it takes time to pour the molten resin into the cavity. This requires a decrease in molding efficiency, resulting in an increase in manufacturing cost.

On the contrary, if the number of resin pouring portions is increased, the weld lines and the traces of the resin pouring portions are increased, so that the appearance and strength of the resin member after molding are deteriorated, but the molten resin can be easily poured into the cavity. Molding efficiency can be improved and manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Therefore, the number of resin pouring portions is determined in consideration of which part of the gaming machine the resin member is arranged, such as the first resin member that the player can contact and the second resin member that the player cannot contact. However, it is necessary to balance aesthetics, strength and molding efficiency.

Therefore, in this type of gaming machine, it is desired to ensure a suitable balance of aesthetics, strength and molding efficiency required for each of the first resin member and the second resin member.

<Background technology and issues 4>
On the back side of the gaming machine, there is a first substrate case which is a main substrate case for accommodating a main substrate, an effect substrate case for accommodating an effect substrate other than the main substrate, a second substrate which is a liquid crystal substrate case for accommodating a liquid crystal substrate, and the like. The case is placed. Each of these board cases is made of transparent resin so that the state of the board inside can be visually recognized.

These substrate cases are molded by the injection molding method, but the traces of the resin pouring part and the weld line cause a decrease in visibility inside the substrate case, and the weld line causes a decrease in the mechanical strength of the substrate case. There's a problem.

In addition, even if the board is used for the same gaming machine, the main board has a great influence on the result of the whole game, and is easily targeted as a fraudulent target such as illegally replacing the integrated circuit device. The first substrate case that houses the substrate is required to have much higher visibility and mechanical strength than the second substrate case that accommodates other sub-boards.

Therefore, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to improve the visibility of the first substrate case.

<Background technology and issues 5>
In this type of gaming machine, a large number of resin parts are used for each board case, back cover, and the like. When manufacturing these resin parts, after molding by pouring molten resin from the resin pouring part into the cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold at high pressure, the movable mold is retracted to open the mold. Then, an injection molding method is adopted in which the resin part is extruded and removed by a plurality of extruded portions on the movable mold side.

When extruding a resin component, the resin component is extruded by simultaneously moving in the extruding direction with the same stroke in a state where a plurality of extruded portions on the movable mold side are in contact with each portion of the resin component. Therefore, in the resin part after molding, a plurality of extruded portion traces are left at a plurality of locations corresponding to each extruded portion.

Resin parts such as a substrate case and a back cover have a concavo-convex structure, and the concavo-convex structure portion has a draft according to the amount of the concavo-convex structure so as to be easily removed from the movable mold. However, even with a single resin part, there is a large difference in the degree of adhesion of the resin part to the movable mold between the part with many uneven structures and a complicated shape and the part with few uneven structures and a simple shape. For each target part of the part, it is necessary to arrange an extruded part having an optimum size for that part at an optimum position.

Therefore, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to be able to arrange an extrusion portion having a size suitable for each position of the resin component.

<Background technology and issues 6>
In this type of gaming machine, a large number of resin molded products such as a production board case and a back cover are adopted. When manufacturing such a molded product, injection is performed by pouring molten resin into a cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold from a plurality of resin pouring portions on the fixed mold side at high pressure and molding the molded product into a predetermined shape. The molding method is adopted.

The board cases such as the production board case and the main board case are made of colorless and transparent resin so that specific parts such as the board management information display part on the internal board side can be visually recognized, and the back cover is the front side production board case and the main board. It is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent resin so that the case and the like can be visually recognized and the specific part such as the board management information display unit in each substrate case can be visually recognized. On the other hand, since the electronic components of the substrate include heat-generating components that generate a large amount of heat, the substrate case and the back cover are provided with a large number of heat-dissipating holes at required locations in order to efficiently dissipate the heat. ..

However, if the substrate case and the back cover have traces of resin pouring parts, heat dissipation holes, etc., light is diffusely reflected at those parts, so that visibility to a specific part is lowered. In addition, if there are through holes such as heat dissipation holes, weld lines are generated on the downstream side of the heat dissipation holes when molding the substrate case and back cover, so the substrate on the substrate side corresponds to the heat dissipation region where many heat dissipation holes are formed. When the management information display unit is arranged, there is a drawback that the display information becomes difficult to see due to the weld line or the like formed on the downstream side of the heat dissipation hole, and the visibility of the display information is lowered.

Therefore, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to be able to prevent a decrease in visibility when a specific portion on the first member side is visually recognized through the second member.

<Background technology and issues 7>
In this type of gaming machine, a large number of resin molded products such as a production board case and a back cover are adopted. When manufacturing such a molded product, injection is performed by pouring molten resin into a cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold from a plurality of resin pouring portions on the fixed mold side at high pressure and molding the molded product into a predetermined shape. The molding method is adopted.

The board cases such as the production board case and the main board case are made of colorless and transparent resin so that specific parts such as the board management information display part on the internal board side can be visually recognized, and the back cover is the front side production board case and the main board. It is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent resin so that the case and the like can be visually recognized and the specific part such as the board management information display unit in each substrate case can be visually recognized. On the other hand, since the electronic components of the substrate include heat-generating components that generate a large amount of heat, the substrate case and the back cover are provided with a large number of heat-dissipating holes at required locations in order to efficiently dissipate the heat. ..

However, if the substrate case and the back cover have traces of resin pouring parts, heat dissipation holes, etc., light is diffusely reflected at those parts, so that visibility to a specific part is lowered. In addition, if there are through holes such as heat dissipation holes, weld lines are generated on the downstream side of the heat dissipation holes when molding the substrate case and back cover, so the substrate on the substrate side corresponds to the heat dissipation region where many heat dissipation holes are formed. When the management information display unit is arranged, there is a drawback that the display information becomes difficult to see due to the weld line or the like formed on the downstream side of the heat dissipation hole, and the visibility of the display information is lowered.

Therefore, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to be able to prevent a decrease in visibility when a specific portion on the first member side is visually recognized through the second member.

<Background technology and issues 8>
In this type of gaming machine, a large number of resin molded products such as a production board case and a back cover are adopted. When manufacturing such a molded product, an injection molding method is adopted in which a molten resin is poured into a cavity between a fixed mold and a movable mold at a high pressure to mold the molded product.

The board cases such as the production board case and the main board case are made of colorless and transparent resin so that the display information of the board management information display part of the board can be visually recognized from the outside, and the back cover is the display information on the board case side and the board side. The display information is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent resin so that it can be visually recognized from the back side.

When molding these substrate cases and back covers with resin, the molten resin is poured into the cavity from the resin pouring portion on the fixed mold side at high pressure to mold, and then the movable mold is retracted to open the mold. Next, the resin part is extruded and removed by the extruded portion on the movable mold side. Therefore, the traces of the resin molding portion such as the trace of the resin pouring portion and the trace of the extruded portion used at the time of molding remain on the substrate case and the back cover.

However, since most of the traces of the resin molded portion are uneven, if the traces of the resin molded portion overlap with specific parts such as the substrate and the information display portion of the substrate case, the light is diffusely reflected at the traces of the resin molded portion. Therefore, the trace of the resin molded portion becomes an obstacle and the visibility of the display information and the like from the back side of the back cover is lowered.

Further, if the substrate case, the back cover, etc. have heat dissipation holes, a weld line is generated on the downstream side of the heat dissipation holes when the substrate case and the back cover are molded. When the board management information display unit on the side is arranged, there is a drawback that the weld line formed on the downstream side of the heat dissipation hole becomes an obstacle and the visibility of the display information is lowered.

Therefore, in such a gaming machine, it is desired to be able to prevent a decrease in visibility when the main part of the back member is visually recognized from the back side of the back cover that protects the back member.

<Background technology and issues 9>
In this type of gaming machine, a large number of resin molded products such as a production board case and a back cover are adopted. When manufacturing such a molded product, injection is performed by pouring molten resin into a cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold from a plurality of resin pouring portions on the fixed mold side at high pressure and molding the molded product into a predetermined shape. The molding method is adopted.

The board cases such as the production board case and the main board case are made of colorless and transparent resin so that the display information of the board management information display part of the board can be visually recognized from the outside, and the back cover is the display information of the board case or the display information of the board. Is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent resin so that it can be visually recognized from the back side.

When molding these substrate cases and back covers with resin, the molten resin is poured into the molding space between the fixed mold and the movable mold at high pressure to mold, and then the movable mold is retracted to open the mold. Then, the resin part is extruded and removed by the extruded portion on the movable mold side. Therefore, the traces of the resin molding portion such as the trace of the resin pouring portion and the trace of the extruded portion used at the time of molding remain on the substrate case and the back cover.

However, since most of the traces of the resin molded part are uneven, if the traces of the resin molded part overlap with the main parts such as the display information of the substrate and the substrate case, the light is diffusely reflected by the traces of the resin molded part. , The trace of the resin molded part becomes an obstacle, and the visibility of the main part such as the display information from the back side of the back cover is lowered.

Further, if the substrate case, the back cover, etc. have heat dissipation holes, a weld line is generated on the downstream side of the heat dissipation holes when the substrate case and the back cover are molded. When the board management information display unit on the side is arranged, there is a drawback that the display information becomes difficult to see due to the weld line or the like formed on the downstream side of the heat dissipation hole, and the visibility of the display information deteriorates.

Therefore, in such a gaming machine, the board management information display unit of the main board in the main board case can be visually recognized through the back cover.

<Background technology and issues 10>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-130192, an image display means is arranged in the central portion of the game area, and game parts such as winning means are arranged in the vicinity thereof. A game board is provided in the main body of the game machine, a game ball is driven into the game area to perform a predetermined game, and a movable effect means is provided on the front surface of the main body of the game machine to perform a specific game during a game on the game board side. On condition that the state is reached, the movable effect means moves forward from the backward position to the forward position, and then the movable effect means returns to the backward position.

When movable means such as a movable effect means and an effect operation button are arranged on the front side of the game machine body, the player can directly contact the movable means. Therefore, depending on the movement of the movable means, the player is playing. There is a risk of injuries caused by movable means. In order to prevent such an unforeseen situation, a display sticker displaying alert information and other alert information display means are placed in a place that is easy for the player to check, and the alert information is displayed. It is desirable to directly or indirectly call attention to the player by the attention alert information displayed on the means.

However, when the movable means performs a plurality of actions, if all the alert information for each action is displayed on the alert information display means, the effectiveness of the alert effect by displaying the alert information is rather reduced. There is a risk of That is, even if a display sticker or the like is attached to the front surface of the game machine body, the area of the affixed area is also limited, and the display sticker cannot be enlarged indefinitely. Therefore, when targeting a movable means that performs a plurality of movements, if the warning information is displayed for each movement for all of the plurality of movements, the display of each warning information becomes too small and the player confirms it. It becomes difficult, and the alerting effect of displaying the alerting information on the display sticker is rather reduced.

In such a gaming machine, it is desirable to be able to prevent a decrease in the alerting effect due to the display of the alerting information display means even though the movable means performs a plurality of operations.

<Background technology and issues 11>
As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144506, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a game board in the main body of the game machine, and a liquid crystal display means constituting the image display means is provided in the central portion of the game area of the game board. , Game parts such as prize-winning means and movable production means are arranged around the area.

On the back side of the game board, an effect board case accommodating an effect board for various effect control and a liquid crystal substrate case accommodating a liquid crystal substrate for controlling a liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right, and game control is performed below the effect board case. A main board case for accommodating the main board for use is arranged.

On the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a power supply board case for accommodating a power supply board for power supply and a payout board case for accommodating a payout board for payout control of game balls are arranged in front and behind under the main board case. Has been done. Further, on the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the entire effect board case and the liquid crystal board case and the upper side of the main board case from the back side is provided so as to be removable and openable.

On the back surface of the back cover, a large number of heat-dissipating holes such as elongated holes and round holes for dissipating heat from heat-generating parts such as the production board case and the liquid crystal board case are formed, and the heat-dissipating holes are used. The heat from the heat-generating parts inside the back cover is dissipated to the outside.

The heat dissipation hole of the conventional back cover has a tapered shape in which the opening end on the outside (back side) or inside (front side) has a small diameter, and is single in one direction over the entire length in the plate thickness direction of the back cover. It is composed of the tapered holes of. In the back cover provided with this single tapered hole-shaped heat radiating hole, when the angle between the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiating hole and the back surface or the front surface of the back cover at the outer peripheral edge of the small diameter side opening end is seen. There are two types, one with a smaller angle and the other with a larger angle.

If the angle between the back surface of the back cover and the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole is reduced, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole will collapse and the inclination angle will increase, and the space between the heat radiation hole molding part of the mold and the back cover will increase. Since the mold release resistance is reduced, the back cover after molding can be easily removed from the mold, the production efficiency of the back cover is improved, and the back cover can be prevented from being deformed at the time of mold release.

However, if the angle formed is small, the outer peripheral portion of the small-diameter opening end of the heat dissipation hole becomes thin, so that the rigidity of the heat radiation hole forming region of the back cover is reduced, and the small diameter side opening edge of the heat dissipation hole is different. There is a problem that the appearance of the back cover as a whole is remarkably deteriorated, such as the contact portion being damaged and appearing white when it comes into contact with the member or the like. In addition, if the edge of the opening on the small diameter side of the heat dissipation hole is thin and sharp, there is a risk of injury at the sharp part during work.

On the other hand, if the angle between the back surface of the back cover and the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiating hole is increased, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiating hole stands up and the inclination angle becomes smaller. In addition to the improvement, there is an advantage that damage to the small-diameter open edge and injury due to the small-diameter open edge can be prevented.

However, if the angle formed is large, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole rises and the mold release resistance between the heat radiation hole molded portion of the mold and the back cover increases, so that the back cover after molding is removed from the mold. There is a problem that it takes time to remove the mold, the production efficiency of the back cover is lowered, and the back cover is easily deformed at the time of mold release. Therefore, it is desired to provide a gaming machine provided with a protective cover that can prevent a decrease in productivity, safety, and durability.

<Background technology and issues 12>
As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-171203, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is supported by a rectangular frame-shaped outer frame fixed to a game island and a hinge means on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable around the vertical axis. It is equipped with an inner frame and a front door that is supported on the inner frame by hinge means so as to be openable and closable around the vertical axis. A game board is detachably attached to the inner frame.

The front door includes a viewing window that allows the game area of the game board to be visually recognized, an upper unit that is arranged above the viewing window, and a lower unit that is arranged below the viewing window. The upper unit is provided with decorative means such as light emitting effect means, and the lower unit is provided with an upper plate for storing game balls for firing, an effect operation means for operation effect, and the like. The front door is pivotally supported by hinge means on the left and right ends, and can be locked to the inner frame in the closed state by locking means on the other end.

In a gaming machine equipped with a large upper unit, the position of the center of gravity of the entire front door side moves significantly to the front side, so that the front door is rotated in the opening direction around the hinge means as compared with a gaming machine without an upper unit. A large moment is occurring. Therefore, not only when the key hole is on the inner frame side, but also when the key hole is on the front door side, when the operation key is inserted into the key hole to open the front door and the locking means is released, Due to the moment, the front door suddenly opens to the front side around the hinge means, and there is a possibility that the manager or the player of the game hall near the front side of the front door may cause an unexpected situation. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the front door from being suddenly opened when the locking means is released.

<Background technology and issues 13>
As described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144506, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a gaming board in the main body of the gaming machine, and a liquid crystal display constituting an image display means is provided in the central portion of the gaming area of the gaming board. As for the means, game parts such as a winning means and a movable effect means are arranged around the means (Patent Document 1).

On the back side of the game board, an effect board case accommodating an effect board for various effect control and a liquid crystal substrate case accommodating a liquid crystal substrate for controlling a liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right, and game control is performed below the effect board case. A main board case for accommodating the main board for use is arranged.

On the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a power supply board case for accommodating a power supply board for power supply and a payout board case for accommodating a payout board for payout control of game balls are arranged in front and behind under the main board case. Has been done. Further, on the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the effect board case, the liquid crystal board case, etc. from the back side is provided so as to be removable and openable.

On the back surface of the back cover, a large number of heat dissipation holes such as elongated holes for dissipating heat from heat-generating back parts such as the production board case and the liquid crystal board case are formed, and the back cover is formed through these heat dissipation holes. The heat from the heat-generating parts inside is dissipated to the outside.

This type of back cover is manufactured by an injection molding method in which a molten resin is poured into a molding space of a mold and molded. When injection molding a large back cover, in order to shorten the molding time and improve the molding efficiency, three or more resin pouring parts are arranged, and each resin pouring part is placed in the molding space of the mold. A method of pouring resin into the mold at almost the same time is adopted.

However, when resin is poured into the molding space of the mold from a plurality of resin casting portions at substantially the same time, and the resins from the respective resin casting portions are merged and molded in the molding space, the number of the resin casting portions is increased. A minute weld line may occur, and the three weld lines may merge at one point.

Now, it is assumed that there are three resin pouring parts of the first to third resin pouring parts, and the resin poured from each of the resin pouring parts is referred to as the first to third resin. When the first to third resins are poured from the first to third resin pouring portions at substantially the same time, the first resin poured from the first resin pouring portion depends on the resin fluidity around each resin pouring portion. And the second resin poured from the second resin pouring portion merge, and then the third resin poured from the third resin pouring portion merges with the first resin and the second resin, and the first thereof. ~ Three weld lines may be generated at the confluence portion of the third resin, and the three weld lines may merge at one point.

Therefore, when resin is poured from three resin pouring portions and molded, the number of weld lines is 3 depending on the relative positional relationship of the resin pouring portions and the resin fluidity of the peripheral portion of each resin pouring portion. In addition to increasing the number of books, the three weld lines merge at one point, so that the strength of the back cover at that portion is greatly reduced.

Therefore, when resin is poured from three or more resin pouring portions to mold a game part such as a protective cover, the number of weld lines generated by the merging of the resins poured from each resin pouring portion is reduced, and the number of weld lines is reduced. It is desirable to be able to prevent crossing of weld lines at one point.

<Background technology and issues 14>
As described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144506, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a gaming board in the main body of the gaming machine, and a liquid crystal display constituting an image display means is provided in the central portion of the gaming area of the gaming board. As for the means, game parts such as a winning means and a movable effect means are arranged around the means (Patent Document 1).

On the back side of the game board, an effect board case accommodating an effect board for various effect control and a liquid crystal substrate case accommodating a liquid crystal substrate for controlling a liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right, and game control is performed below the effect board case. A main board case for accommodating the main board for use is arranged. On the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a power supply board case for accommodating a power supply board for power supply and a payout board case for accommodating a payout board for payout control of game balls are arranged in front and behind under the main board case. Has been done. Further, on the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the effect board case, the liquid crystal board case, etc. from the back side is provided so as to be removable and openable.

On the back surface of the back cover, a large number of heat dissipation holes such as elongated holes for dissipating heat from heat-generating back parts such as the production board case and the liquid crystal board case are formed, and the back cover is formed through these heat dissipation holes. The heat from the heat-generating parts inside is dissipated to the outside.

In the injection molding of the back cover in which a large number of heat radiating holes are arranged vertically and horizontally in the heat radiating area, the heat radiating holes become a flow obstructing factor that hinders the flow of the resin. The molding efficiency is improved by arranging them in a dispersed manner and pouring the resin into the mold from each resin pouring portion.

However, if such a molding method is adopted, there is a problem that the strength of the back cover is lowered due to the weld line generated by the resin poured from each resin pouring portion merging around the heat radiation hole. For example, when resin pouring portions are arranged on both the left and right sides of a group of heat radiation holes where a large number of heat radiation holes are concentrated, if the resin pouring portions on both the left and right sides are arranged symmetrically with respect to a specific heat radiation hole, the left and right sides can be arranged. Weld lines generated by merging the resin poured from the resin pouring portion at the merging portions on both the upper and lower sides of a specific heat radiation hole may be lined up on one straight line in the vertical direction. If the weld lines on both the upper and lower sides of the specific heat radiating hole are generated linearly in this way, there is a possibility that the strength of the back cover will be significantly reduced by the weld lines.

Therefore, when the resins poured from the plurality of resin pouring portions are merged around the opening and molded, the weld line generated around the opening can be displaced in the resin flow direction to prevent a decrease in strength. It is desirable to do so.

<Background technology and issues 15>
As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144506, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a game board in the main body of the game machine, and a liquid crystal display means constituting the image display means is provided in the central portion of the game area of the game board. , Game parts such as prize-winning means and movable production means are arranged around the area.

On the back side of the game board, an effect board case accommodating an effect board for various effect control and a liquid crystal substrate case accommodating a liquid crystal substrate for controlling a liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right, and game control is performed below the effect board case. A main board case for accommodating the main board for use is arranged.

On the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a power supply board case for accommodating a power supply board for power supply and a payout board case for accommodating a payout board for payout control of game balls are arranged in front and behind under the main board case. Has been done. Further, on the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the effect board case, the liquid crystal board case, etc. from the back side is provided so as to be removable and openable.

On the back surface of the back cover, a large number of heat dissipation holes such as elongated holes for dissipating heat from heat-generating back parts such as the production board case and the liquid crystal board case are formed, and the back cover is formed through these heat dissipation holes. The heat from the heat-generating parts inside is dissipated to the outside.

When injection molding a back cover in which a large number of heat radiating holes are arranged vertically and horizontally in the heat radiating area, resin is applied from a plurality of resin pouring parts such as the first and second resin pouring parts arranged in or around the heat radiating area. It is poured and molded at almost the same time.

For example, when the first and second resins are poured from the first and second resin pouring portions, the first and second resins resist the flow resistance of the surrounding molding space and move toward the outer peripheral side for each resin pouring portion. And sequentially flow and merge at the intermediate portion between the resin pouring portions, so that a weld line is generated at the confluence portion.

If this weld line is generated corresponding to the visual recognition part for visually recognizing the component information of the electronic component on the control board in the board case, it becomes difficult to read the component information from the visual recognition portion, and the narrowness between the openings is narrow. If it occurs in a portion, there is a problem that the mechanical strength of the narrow portion is lowered. Therefore, when designing the back cover, it is necessary to arrange the weld line at a position away from a specific part where visibility or mechanical strength is required.

Therefore, it is desirable that the weld line generated by the confluence of the resins poured from the plurality of resin pouring portions can be arranged at a position deviated from the specific portion.

1 Gaming machine 2 Outer frame (gaming machine body)
3 Inner frame (game machine body)
20 Back cover 21 3rd hinge means 22 Back cover (protective cover, game parts)
22D lower part (first area)
22U upper part (second area)
22L Hinge side part 22R Anti-hinge side part 24 Latch means 48 Ball tank 49 Guide rail 56 Lower unit 57,58 1st and 2nd upper unit 64 Operation button 66 Vibration means 67 Rotating light emitting means 68 Body 68a Notch (flow) Inhibitor)
70 Operation unit (operation top)
73, 74 1st and 2nd locking means 90,192,207,217,252,280 Resin pouring part trace 91a, 91b, 281a Extruded part trace 98 Engagement means 99 Fastening means 114 Movable effect body 114A Origin position 114B Advance position 114C Projection position 114D Storage position 118 Operation unit 118A Origin position 118B Advance position 120 to 124 1st to 5th warning display means 133 Production board 134 Production board case (heat-generating back member)
135 Liquid crystal board 136 Liquid crystal board case (heat-generating back member)
137 Main board 138 Main board case 140 Power supply board 141 Power supply board case 142 Payout board 143 Payout board case 144 Back part 145a, 145b, 145c, 145d Bending part 147 Hinge shaft 148 Hinge bearing 149 Regulatory means 167 Recession 174,195,210, 235 Integrated circuit device 176 Operating means 178,200,213,239 Board management information display unit 179,199,212,240 Parts information display unit 183,204,214,233,243,264,400 Heat dissipation hole (opening)
184,246 Opening history notation means 188,248 Opening history notation stickers 192a, 192b, 208a, 208b, 216a, 216b, 251a, 251b, 283 Weld line 294 1st regulating means 295 2nd regulating means 264A Heat dissipation area 264B Non-radiating area 302 Boundary portion 302a Stepped portion 303, 304 First and second outer spreading portions 303a, 304a Inner peripheral surface 303b Inner opening end 304b Outer opening end 303w, 304w Opening amount 307,308 Upper, lower First hinge mechanism 309,310 Upper , Lower second hinge mechanism 319 Locking housing part 323,328 1st and 2nd receivers 324,329 1st and 2nd hooks 333 Release operation mechanism 345 Coordinating members 359,360 1st and 2nd lifting means 361 Front door Stopping means 362 Receiving member 363 Bottom member G1, G2 First and second resin pouring parts G11, G21 First and second resin pouring parts traces g1, g2 First and second resin R1 to R3 First to third confluence parts WL1 to WL3 1st to 3rd weld lines C3 Resin flow guide unit C3-1, C3-2 1st and 2nd resin flow guide unit 391 Board information display means (specific part)
398,407-409,419,424-426 Flow blocker 410 Narrow passage (specific site)

Claims (4)

Equipped with a protective cover that protects the heat-generating backing member
The protective cover is used in a gaming machine having a plurality of heat dissipation holes formed in a vertically long elongated hole shape to dissipate heat from the heat generating back member to the outside.
The heat radiating hole is characterized by having a first outer spreading portion and a second outer spreading portion formed in an outward expanding shape in the opposite direction in the plate thickness direction from an intermediate boundary portion in the plate thickness direction of the protective cover. A game machine to be. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first outer spreading portion and the second outer spreading portion have a tapered shape having a small diameter on the boundary portion side. The angle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the first outer spreading portion located on the heat-generating back member side of the protective cover and the inner surface of the protective cover on the heat-generating back member side is
The protective cover is characterized in that it is larger than the angle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the second outer spreading portion located on the opposite side of the heat-generating back member and the outer surface opposite to the heat-generating back member. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2. The heat-generating back member is a substrate case that houses a substrate for control.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the protective cover is a back cover that protects the substrate case from the back side.

Images